Your Choice 3/Your Choice Software Collection 3.iso/os2/gbase/install.001/GUIDE.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1993-10-26 | 499.5 KB | 19,030 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Guidelines Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                  Γûá Welcome to the Online Help for Guidelines Γûá

The information is arranged into the following sections:

    Γûá The Guidelines Main Window
    Γûá The Action Editor
    Γûá The JOT Language
    Γûá Standard Controls

 Click on one of these topics to to get more information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. The Guidelines Main Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Guidelines Main Window (also known as the Client Window) is the starting
point for any Guidelines application you create.

This window is the centre of attention during the creation of an application
since this is where any objects you create will be displayed.

The Guidelines Client Window consists of seven main parts.

    Γûá The Title Bar
    Γûá The Menu Bar
    Γûá The Editor Tool Bar
    Γûá The Controls Tool Bar
    Γûá The Properties Bar
    Γûá The Work Area
    Γûá The Status Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. The Title Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Title Bar

The title bar displays the name of the .GUI file currently being edited.

If no file has been selected, the word Untitled is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. The Editor Tool Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Editor Toolbar

This tool bar provides a convenient way for you to quickly access commonly-used
Guidelines functions, and provides a short-cut to the pull-down menus.

The Editor Tool Bar differs from the Controls Tool Bar because it contains
actions to perform, rather than objects to create.

The buttons correspond to the following main menu items:

When an action is unavailable, the icon in the toolbar is grey, to indicate
that it is inactive. Clicking with the Right Mouse Button on the icon will
display the function represented in the Status Bar.

At any one time, the tool bar contains two groups of pushbuttons - the Group
Mode Selection buttons and the Control Edit buttons.

The Group Mode Selection buttons are used to toggle between Create Mode  (the
default) and Group Mode

The buttons change in appearance to reflect the current mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. The Controls Tool Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Controls Tool Bar

The controls tool bar contains icons representing the controls you can create
using Guidelines  and provide a shortcut to the options in the Create menu.
Clicking with the Right Mouse Button on the icon will display the name of the
object represented in the Status Bar.

The Editor Tool Bar gives similar short-cuts, but for actions to perform,
rather than objects to create.

The actual selection that appears is determined by which controls you have
installed and the settings in the Customize Toolbars dialog, which is accessed
from the Options: Customize Toolbars menu item.

The toolbar is only enabled when it is possible to create controls. When there
is no Frame or Dialog window active, or when in Group Mode the tool bar is
disabled. Clicking with the Right Mouse Button on the icon will display the
function represented in the Status Bar.

To use the tool bar, first click on the control you wish to create, then move
the pointer to the position on the frame or dialog where you wish to place the
control.

The cursor changes to a position indicator, the tip of the arrow denoting the
botton left hand corner of where the control will be placed. Clicking the left
mouse button will create the control at that position.

If the 'Dialog on create' option is active ( Options: Dialog on Create menu
item is ticked) the settings dialog for the control will automatically be
opened. If not, double clicking on the control will have the same effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.1. Toolbar - Create Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Mode

In Create Mode, the Control tool bar displays the controls which they can be
used to create. You create new controls by selecting one of these buttons and
clicking on your application window (or dialog box) in the position you want
the new control to be created.

Each of the controls available for creation via the Tool Bar is also available
via the Create menu pulldown.

Note:  The above controls are the default controls supplied with Guidelines.
       Additional controls may be available if you purchased a Custom Control
       Library for use with Guidelines.

Please refer to the documentation which came with your library for information
specific to these controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.2. Toolbar - Group Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group Mode

This mode is entered by selecting either of the Group Mode Selection Buttons.

    Γûá Selecting the Group Select Button  selects group mode but does not
    automatically select any controls

    Γûá Selecting the Group Select All Button  selects group mode and
    automatically selects all controls in the current window.

    When group mode is entered, the Editing Function buttons are replaced by
    the Group Alignment Buttons.  Clicking with the Right Mouse Button on the
    icon will display the name of the object represented in the Status Bar.

    Each of the buttons available for selection is also available via the Group
    menu. The following buttons are available on the Tool Bar:

       Align Left
       Align Centre
       Align Right
       Align Top
       Align Middle
       Align Bottom
       Space Horizontally
       Space Vertically
       Even Horizontal Size
       Even Vertical Size

 The Guidelines display provides the following helpful features during control
 selection in group mode:

 Γûá When you select controls, a bounding frame is drawn around them to indicate
 the controls making up the group.

 Γûá Selection of controls is a toggle action: clicking on the control again will
 remove it from the group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. The Properties Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Properties Bar

The properties bar is used to display and change some of the properties of the
currently selected object.

The first two fields, both entry controls, give respectively the Name by which
the control is known within Guidelines and the text displayed for that item.

Each may be edited by clicking in the field and typing in the changes.

When you have finished altering the value of the property, you can accept it by
hitting [Enter] or by selecting the Accept Button on the properties bar.

If you wish to cancel your changes, either press [Esc] or select the Discard
Button on the properties bar.

The third field gives the object's position and size. The first part of this
field gives the coordinates (x,y) of the bottom leftmost pixel of the currently
selected object, or the current location of the mouse pointer if a new object
is being created.

These are displayed as either Window or Dialog coordinates, depending upon the
setting of the Coordinates menu item on the Options menu. This field is only
displayed if the Show Tracking option is selected in the Customize Toolbars...
Dialog.

The second part of this field gives the size in pixels (horizontal, vertical)
of the currently selected object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. The Work Area ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Work Area

The work area of the Guidelines Client Window is not currently used for any
special purpose. It simply provides a uniform background upon which application
windows and dialog boxes can be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. The Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Status Bar

The status bar is situated at the bottom of the Guidelines Client Window.

The left hand field displays brief help information for each menu option as it
is selected, as well as status information on startup.

The right side contains a number of buttons which provide short-cuts to
commonly used functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. Menu Bar Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Bar

This section details the choices available from the Menu Bar of the Visual
Editor.

It contains the following sections:

    Γûá The File Menu
    Γûá The Create Menu
    Γûá The Edit Menu
    Γûá The Group Menu
    Γûá The Options Menu
    Γûá The Windows Menu
    Γûá The Output Menu
    Γûá The Help Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1. The File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Menu

The File menu contains options for creating, opening, and saving a Guidelines
application.

In addition, it allows you to change the properties of the current application,
to import existing resource (.RC and .RES) and dialog (.DLG) files and to track
and maintain different versions of applications.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá New
    Γûá Open
    Γûá Save
    Γûá Save As...
    Γûá Auto Save...
    Γûá Application Settings...
    Γûá Application Directories...
    Γûá Import
    Γûá Print
    Γûá Exit


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.1. File: New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: New

This option is selected to clear the workspace for the creation of a new
application.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [CTRL + N]

 Notes
         If a changed application is already loaded, Guidelines informs you
         that data has changed and asks if you wish to save it first.

         If you select Yes at this prompt, your current application will be
         saved according to the description under File: Save

         If you select No, the workspace will be cleared without your changes
         being saved.

         If you select Cancel, you will be returned to the current application,
         where you can continue to work.

         Once the workspace is cleared and you are able to create the windows
         plus associated controls and action modules for your new application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.2. File: Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Open

This option allows you to open an existing application for editing or building.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [CTRL + O]

 Notes
         When this option is selected, the standard Guidelines File Open dialog
         box is displayed, allowing you to select the file to load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.3. File: Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Save

Selecting this option causes Guidelines to save changes to your application
permanently to disk.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [CTRL + S]

 Notes
         This option is available only if you have previously given your
         application file a name using the File: Save As menu option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.4. File: Save As... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Save As

This option allows you to save your application under another name.

 Toolbar Icon
         None

 Accelerator
         None

 Notes
         Selecting this option displays the standard Guidelines Save As dialog
         box which allows you to type a new name for the current application
         file and choose the directory you wish to save it in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.5. File: Auto Save... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Auto-Save

Selecting this option displays the Auto-Save dialog box which allows you to
turn auto-save on and off and to enter the frequency at which auto-save occurs.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When auto-save is activated, Guidelines will automatically save the
         application you are working on to reduce the risk of accidental loss
         due to power failure, accidental restart of your computer, etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.6. File: Application Settings... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Application Settings

Selecting this option displays the Application Settings dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This allows you to specify information about your application, such as
         its Title, Copyright message etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.7. File: Application Directories... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Application Directories

Selecting this option displays the Application Directories dialog box which
allows you to specify the directories to be used for this application.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.8. File: Import ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Import

The File: Import submenu offers you the choice of importing from three
different types of resource file.

    Γûá .DLG (Dialog Template)
    Γûá .RC (Resource Script)
    Γûá .RES (Compiled Resources)

 The ability to import existing resource files is useful for converting your
 existing applications into Guidelines applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.8.1. File: Import .DLG (Dialog Template)... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: .DLG (Dialog Template)...

Selecting this option allows you to import a Dialog Template (usually in a file
with a .DLG extension. The Import Dialogs dialog box is displayed, so you can
select the file to import.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.8.2. File Import .RC (Resource Script)... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this option displays the Import Resources dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The chosen dialog has the same appearance as the Import Dialogs dialog
         box. but allows you to select files with a .RC extension.

         When a file is loaded, it is assumed to be a resource script, and the
         resources defined in it are added to your current application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.8.3. File Import .RES (Compiled Resources)... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this option displays the Import Compiled Resources dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The chosen dialog has the same appearance as the Import Dialogs dialog
         box, but allows you to select files with a .RES extension.

         When a file is loaded, it is assumed to be a compiled resource file,
         and the resources defined in it are added to your current application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.9. File: Print... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Print...

Selecting this option displays the Print Windows dialog, which allows the user
to print windows in the application and to set up the printer to be used.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + P]

 Notes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.10. {File History} ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: {File History}

Guidelines maintains a record of the last five application files you have
worked on and displays these files as options in the File Menu.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select one of the displayed file names, it is loaded as if
         you had selected File Open... and chosen its name from the File Open
         dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.1.11. File: Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File: Exit

The Exit menu option provides a way of closing Guidelines.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         [F3]

 Notes
         If you have unsaved data, you will be prompted in the manner described
         for File: New

         Once your data is saved, the Exit Guidelines dialog box will be
         displayed and you will be asked to confirm that you wish to exit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2. The Create Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Menu

The Create Menu provides you with a means of building your application,
beginning with the Main Window.

Many of the options available on this menu are also available on the Controls
Tool Bar.

Additional options may be available on this menu, depending on any extra custom
control extensions Guidelines may be using.

When you select the menu item, the cursor changes to indicate that you are
inserting a new control and that you should select the position for the control
in an application window or dialog box.

If the Dialog on Create option on the Options menu is not checked, the control
will be created (using default options) once you have selected its position.

Otherwise, the appropriate details dialog box is displayed, allowing you to
enter the required information for the control, which is then created.

The menu contains at least the following items:

    Γûá Frame...
    Γûá Dialog...
    Γûá Menu Item...
    Γûá Button Submenu
    Γûá Entry Field...
    Γûá Multiple-Line Entry Field...
    Γûá List Box...
    Γûá Combo Box...
    Γûá Static Submenu
    Γûá Scroll Bar Submenu
    Γûá Custom Control...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.1. Create: Frame... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Frame

Selecting this option allows you to create a new Frame Window for your
application. The details are set using the Frame Window Details dialog, which
appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create
option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This window may be defined as the Main Window or as a secondary
         window.

         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a frame window with
         default properties is created and placed in the centre of the screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.2. Create: Dialog... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Dialog

Selecting this option allows you to create a new Dialog Window for your
application. The details are set using the Frame Window Details dialog, which
appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create
option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The Frame Window Details dialog box is used to edit the details for a
         dialog box. However, a different set of default window options is
         used, reflecting the difference between a standard dialog box and an
         application window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.3. Create: Menu Item... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Menu Item

Selecting this option allows you to create a new Menu Item on the Menu Bar of
your application window. The details are set using the Menu Item Details
dialog, which appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog
on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on
the control.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a menu item with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4. Create Button Submenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button Sub-menu

This submenu is used to display a list of button-types which you can create
using Guidelines.

The selectable types are:

    Γûá Push Button
    Γûá Radio Button
    Γûá Check Box
    Γûá 3-State Check Box
    Γûá User Button
 .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4.1. Create: Button: Push Button... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Button: Push Button

Selecting this option allows you to create a Push Button The details are set
using the Button Details dialog, which appears automatically when the control
is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or
when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a push button with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4.2. Create: Button: Radio Button... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Button: Radio Button

Selecting this option allows you to create a Radio Button The details are set
using the Button Details dialog, which appears automatically when the control
is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or
when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a radio button with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4.3. Create: Button: Check Box... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Button: Check Box

Selecting this option allows you to create a Check Box The details are set
using the Button Details dialog, which appears automatically when the control
is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or
when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a check box with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4.4. Create: Button: 3-State Check Box... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Button: 3-State Check Box...

Selecting this option allows you to create a 3-State Check Box The details are
set using the Button Details dialog, which appears automatically when the
control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options
menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a 3-state check box
         with default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.4.5. Create: Button: User Button... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Button: User Button

Selecting this option allows you to create a User Button The details are set
using the Button Details dialog, which appears automatically when the control
is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or
when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a user button with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.5. Create: Entry Field... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Entry Field

Selecting this option allows you to create an Entry Field in the specified
window or dialog box. The details are set using the Entry Field Details dialog,
which appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on
Create option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the
control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, an entry field with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.6. Create: Multiple-Line Entry Field... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Multiple-Line Entry Field

Selecting this option allows you to create a Multiple-Line Entry Field in the
specified window or dialog box. The details are set using the Multiple-Line
Entry Field Details dialog, which appears automatically when the control is
created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options menu) or when
you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a multiple-line entry
         field with default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.7. Create: List Box... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: List Box

Selecting this option allows you to create a List Box in the specified window
or dialog box. The details are set using the List Box Details dialog, which
appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create
option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a list box with default
         properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.8. Create: Combo Box... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Combo Box

Selecting this option allows you to create a Combo Box in the specified window
or dialog box. The details are set using the Combo Box Details dialog, which
appears automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create
option is checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a combo box with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9. Create: Static Submenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static Sub-menu

This submenu allows you to create a static control for your window or dialog
box. Selecting any of the submenu items presented results in the display of the
Static Details dialog box with options selected which are appropriate to the
type of static control you select..

The selectable types are:

    Γûá Create: Static: Static Text
    Γûá Create: Static: Group Box
    Γûá Create Static Icon
    Γûá Create: Static: System Icon
    Γûá Create: Static: Bitmap
    Γûá Create: Static: Rectangle


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.1. Create: Static: Static Text... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: Static Text

Selecting this option allows you to create a Static Text control. The details
are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically when the
control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options
menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.2. Create: Static: Group Box... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: Group Box

Selecting this option allows you to create a static Group Box control. The
details are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically
when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the
Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.3. Create: Static: Icon... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: Icon

Selecting this option allows you to create a static Icon control. The details
are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically when the
control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options
menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.4. Create: Static: System Icon... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: System Icon

Selecting this option allows you to create a static System Icon control. The
details are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically
when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the
Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.5. Create: Static: Bitmap... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: Bitmap

Selecting this option allows you to create a static Bitmap control. The details
are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically when the
control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the Options
menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.9.6. Create: Static: Rectangle... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Static: Rectangle

Selecting this option allows you to create a static Rectangle control. The
details are set using the Static Details dialog, which appears automatically
when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the
Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a static control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.10. Create: Scroll Bar Submenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Scroll Bar Sub-menu

This submenu allows you to create scroll bars for your window or dialog box.
When you select one of the submenu options, the Scroll Bar Details dialog box.
is displayed, allowing you to define the style of the scroll bar.

The selectable types are:

    Γûá Vertical Scroll Bar
    Γûá Horizontal Scroll Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.10.1. Create: Scroll Bar: Vert. Scroll Bar... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Scroll Bar: Vertical Scroll Bar

Selecting this option allows you to create a Vertical Scroll Bar control. The
details are set using the Scroll Bar Details dialog, which appears
automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is
checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a scroll bar control
         with default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.10.2. Create Scroll Bar Horz. Scroll Bar... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Scroll Bar: Horizontal Scroll Bar

Selecting this option allows you to create a Horizontal Scroll Bar control. The
details are set using the Scroll Bar Details dialog, which appears
automatically when the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is
checked on the Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a scroll bar control
         with default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.2.11. Create: Custom Control... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create: Custom Control

Selecting this option allows you to create a Custom control. The details are
set using the Custom Control Details dialog, which appears automatically when
the control is created (if the Dialog on Create option is checked on the
Options menu) or when you double-click on the control.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         If the Dialog on Create option is not checked, a custom control with
         default properties is created.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3. The Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit Menu

The Edit menu contains options for editing the various elements which make up
your PM application.

In addition, it provides you with a means of using the clipboard to copy, cut
and paste various elements of your application.

The menu contains the following items:

    Γûá Undo
    Γûá Cut
    Γûá Copy
    Γûá Paste
    Γûá Clear
    Γûá Presentation Parameters...
    Γûá Resources...
    Γûá Message Boxes...
    Γûá Help Panels...
    Γûá Action Modules...
    Γûá External Files...
    Γûá Menu Arrangement...
    Γûá Group/Tab Order...
    Γûá Copy Window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.1. Edit: Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Undo

This menu option allows you to undo the most recent editing change you have
made.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl+U]

 Notes
         Should you realize that you have inadvertently deleted, or otherwise
         changed, the wrong object, selecting this option will restore the
         object to its state before editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.2. Edit: Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Cut

Selecting this option copies the current selection to the clipboard Edit: and
deletes it from your workspace.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Shift+Del]

 Notes
         Select another object and select Edit: Paste to insert the selection
         into it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.3. Edit: Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Copy

Selecting this option copies the current selection to the clipboard Edit: and
deletes it from your workspace.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl+Ins]

 Notes
         This option is similar to Edit: Cut except that it leaves the original
         selection unchanged and  makes a copy of it in the clipboard.

         This is useful for duplicating controls etc. in your application
         window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.4. Edit: Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Paste

Selecting this option, when available, pastes the clipboard contents into the
currently selected object.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Shift+Ins]

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.5. Edit: Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Clear

This option is similar to Edit: Cut except that it does not place the selection
into the clipboard.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Del]

 Notes
         If this option is selected, the only way to restore the selection is
         to immediately select Edit: Undo before making any more changes to
         your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.6. Edit: Presentation Parameters... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Presentation Parameters

Selecting this option displays the Presentation Parameters dialog box which
allows you to modify presentation parameters for use by your application.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.7. Edit: Resources... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Resources

This option allows you to edit the list of resources available to your
application.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option, the Resources Edit dialog box is
         presented, allowing you to add, edit and delete resource entries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.8. Edit: Message Boxes... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Message Boxes

Selecting this option displays the Message Boxes which allows you to add, edit
and delete your applications predefined messages.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.9. Edit: Help Panels... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Help Panels

This option displays the Help Panels dialog. Here, you may add, edit or delete
help panels for use by your application.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.10. Edit: Action Modules... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Action Modules

Selecting this option displays the Action Editor

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The Action Editor allows you to define additional action modules which
         are callable from action modules defined for window events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.11. Edit: External Files... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: External Files

Selecting this option displays the External File Groups dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         Using this dialog box, you may define the interfaces to external files
         required to be used by your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.12. Edit: Menu Arrangement... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Menu Arrangement

When this option is selected, the Menu Arrangement dialog box is displayed.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         Selecting this option allows you to modify the layout of your action
         bar menus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.13. Edit: Group/Tab Order... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Group/Tab Order

Selecting this option displays the Group/Tab Order dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This option allows you to change the tab order of controls on your
         window or dialog box, and to assign groups of controls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.3.14. Edit: Copy Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Copy Window

This option allows you to copy the contents of an existing window on your
desktop.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When this option is selected, Guidelines places itself in the
         background and the cursor changes to the selection pointer.

         When you select a window using this pointer, Guidelines copies the
         contents of that window, including all of its child windows and menus,
         and creates a new window of the same size and at the same location on
         the screen. This window contains all the controls and menus of the
         original window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4. The Group Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group Menu

The group menu contains options which are applicable during Group mode and is
only available when a window is selected which contains one or more controls.

Short-cuts to these options are provided by the Controls Tool Bar when in Group
Mode

The menu contains the following items:

    Γûá Select
    Γûá Select All
    Γûá Align Left
    Γûá Align Centre
    Γûá Align Right
    Γûá Align Top
    Γûá Align Middle
    Γûá Align Bottom
    Γûá Space Horizontally
    Γûá Space Vertically
    Γûá Even Horizontal Size
    Γûá Even Vertical Size


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.1. Group: Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Select

This option toggles the selection of group mode, a check being shown on the
menu when active.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.2. Group: Select All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Select All

Selecting this option has the same effect as the Group Select option with the
additional effect of automatically selecting all controls in the current
window.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.3. Group: Align Left ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Left

Selecting this option allows you to align all of the currently-selected
controls to the left-hand side of a window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         aligned to the left of that reference. The vertical positions of the
         controls remain unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.4. Group: Align Centre ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Centre

Selecting this option causes all of the currently-selected controls to be
centred horizontally in the window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         centred on that reference, the vertical positions of the controls
         remaining unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.5. Group: Align Right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Right

Selecting this option allows you to align all of the currently-selected
controls to the right-hand side of a window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         aligned to the right of that reference, the vertical positions of the
         controls remaining unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.6. Group: Align Top ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Top

Selecting this option allows you to vertically align all of the
currently-selected controls to the top of a window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         aligned to the top of that reference, the horizontal positions of the
         controls remaining unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.7. Group: Align Middle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Middle

Selecting this option causes all of the currently-selected controls to be
centred vertically in the window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         centred on that reference, the horizontal positions of the controls
         remaining unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.8. Group: Align Bottom ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Align Bottom

Selecting this option allows you to vertically align all of the
currently-selected controls to the bottom of a window you specify.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         aligned to the bottom of that reference, the horizontal positions of
         the controls remaining unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.9. Group: Space Horizontally ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Space Horizontally

Selecting this option allows you to evenly space all of the currently-selected
controls along the horizontal axis.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         spaced evenly along the horizontal axis of the reference window. The
         vertical positions of the controls are unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.10. Group: Space Vertically ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Space Vertically

Selecting this option allows you to evenly space all of the currently-selected
controls along the vertical axis.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, all of the selected controls are
         spaced evenly along the vertical axis of the reference window. The
         horizontal positions of the controls are unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.11. Group: Even Horizontal Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Even Horizontal Size

Selecting this option allows you to make all of the currently-selected controls
the same width.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, the horizontal size of the
         selected controls is adjusted. The vertical size (height) of each
         control remains unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.4.12. Group: Even Vertical Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group: Even Vertical Size

Selecting this option allows you to make all of the currently-selected controls
the same height.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select this option the cursor changes to the selection
         pointer to allow you to choose the reference window for alignment.

         You may choose a control, the group frame or the parent window as the
         reference window. reference window.

         Once you select the reference window, the vertical size of the
         selected controls is adjusted. The horizontal size (width) of each
         control remains unchanged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5. The Options Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options Menu

The Options Menu provides you with a means of configuring the behaviour of
Guidelines.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Short/Long Menus
    Γûá Save Editor Position
    Γûá Dialog on Create
    Γûá Auto Create Mode
    Γûá Restrict Children
    Γûá Lock All Positions
    Γûá Unlock All Positions
    Γûá Confirmations...
    Γûá Default Directories
    Γûá Default Window Settings
    Γûá View Extensions...
    Γûá Customise Toolbars...
    Γûá Coordinates Submenu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.1. Options: Short Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Short Menus

Selecting this option results in Guidelines displaying a reduced set of menu
items on the action bar, with some menu items being hidden.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This results in a menu structure which is easier to navigate, as less
         frequently used items are hidden.

         When Short Menus are in effect, the name of this option changes to
         Long Menus, which when selected causes Guidelines to revert back to
         the full set of menu options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.2. Options: Long Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Long Menus

Selecting this option results in Guidelines displaying the full set of menu
items on the action bar.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When Long Menus are in effect, the name of this option changes to
         Short Menus, which, when selected, causes Guidelines to display a
         reduced set of menu items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.3. Options: Save Editor Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Save Editor Position

Checking this option causes Guidelines to save its screen position when exiting
and to restore it again when restarting.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This allows you to save a particular window size and position on the
         screen for Guidelines  which suits your monitor and personal
         preferences, without having to adjust it each time you run Guidelines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.4. Options: Dialog on Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Dialog on Create

If this option is checked (active), a dialog box will be displayed whenever a
new control is created; otherwise the dialog box will not be displayed.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This option can be useful when you want to add a number of controls to
         a window without changing any of the default information for the
         control.

         The disadvantage of this mode is that controls are created using
         system-defined names, such as PushButton1, PushButton2, etc.

         (In this case, the controls can be edited individually by
         double-clicking on them with the Left Mouse Button.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.5. Options: Auto Create Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Auto Create Mode

Auto Create Mode allows you to create more than one control of a certain type
by selecting that type once from the Create Menu or from the Tool Bar.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select the control from the Tool Bar or the Create Menu and
         move the mouse cursor over the selected window, the cursor changes to
         the Position Select cursor and you can then place the control by
         clicking with the LMB at the desired location.

         You can repeatedly place controls by simply clicking the LMB, then
         turn off create mode by clicking once again on the Tool Bar button or
         the menu option you used to enter Auto-Create mode.

         If Options: Dialog on Create is checked, the dialog box appropriate to
         your control will be displayed when you select a position for your new
         control. Use this dialog box to change the details of your control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.6. Options: Restrict Children ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Restrict Children

When this option is checked, Guidelines will restrict the movement of child
windows so that they may only be placed fully within the parent window.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
          Guidelines will not allow you to move any part of the child window
         outside of its parent window.

         If this option is not checked, Guidelines allows you to move the child
         window so that part of it is outside its parent window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.7. Options: Lock All Positions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Lock All Positions

Checking this option locks the positions and sizes of all controls in a window.
This prevents the controls from being accidentally disturbed while you are
selecting them to change their settings.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This is the converse of Options: Unlock All Positions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.8. Options: Unlock All Positions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Unlock All Positions

Checking this option unlocks the positions of all controls in a window. This
allows the controls to be resized and moved again.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This is the converse of Options: Lock All Positions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.9. Options: Confirmations... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Confirmations

Selecting this option displays the Confirmations dialog box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         Using this dialog box, you select whether you want Guidelines to
         prompt you when you carry out various actions on your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.10. Options: Default Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Default Directories

Selecting this option displays the Default Directories dialog box, which allows
you to specify the directories in which the various Guidelines files may be
found.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.11. Options: Default Window Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Default Window Settings

Selecting this option displays the Default Window Settings dialog box. This
allows you to set the default grid options for Guidelines application windows.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.12. Options: View Extensions... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: View Extensions

Selecting this option displays the Extensions... dialog box, which provides a
list of all the extensions found by Guidelines.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This also shows version and status information, allowing you to
         determine whether or not all extensions were loaded correctly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.13. Options: Customize Toolbar... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Customize Toolbar

Selecting this option displays the Customize Extensions dialog box which allows
you to customize the layout of the Guidelines Toolbar.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The layout is saved on exit and is used every time you load
         Guidelines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.14. Options: Coordinates Submenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Coordinates Submenu

This submenu controls the information displayed in the Window coordinates and
Window size windows on the Property Bar.

It contains the items:

 Γûá Window

 Γûá Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.14.1. Options: Coordinates: Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Coordinates: Window

When this option is checked, the coordinates displayed on the Property Bar are
measured in window coordinates (pixels).

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.5.14.2. Options: Coordinates: Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options: Coordinates: Dialog

When this option is checked, the coordinates displayed on the Property Bar are
measured in dialog coordinates as used by the Dialog Box Editor.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6. The Windows Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows Menu

The Windows Menu allows you to manage the display of windows you have within
your Guidelines application.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Window List...
    Γûá Select Window Submenu
    Γûá Show All Windows
    Γûá Hide All Windows
    Γûá [Window List]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.1. Windows: Window List... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Window List

Selecting this option displays the Window List dialog box, which displays the
list of windows making up your current application.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.2. Windows: Select Window Submenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Select Window Submenu

This submenu provides a means of navigating around the windows you have
created.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá First Previous Next Last


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.3. Windows: Select Window: First ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Select Window: First

Selecting this option displays the ...

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.4. Windows: Select Window: Previous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Select Window: Previous

Selecting this option displays the ...

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.5. Windows: Select Window: Next ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Select Window: Next

Selecting this option displays the ...

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.6. Windows: Select Window: Last ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Select Window: Last

Selecting this option displays the ...

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.7. Windows: Show All Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Show All Windows

This option causes all of your application's windows to be displayed.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.8. Windows: Hide All Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: Hide All Windows

This option causes all of your application's windows to be hidden.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.6.9. Windows: [Window List] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows: [Window List]

The bottom portion of the Windows Menu is a list of all window names appearing
in your current application.

When you select a window name, it is displayed in the Guidelines work space and
its name is checked on the windows Menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7. The Output Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output Menu

This menu is used when you wish to test your application, or to generate source
code based on the windows and action modules you have defined for your
application.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Test Mode
    Γûá Options...
    Γûá Generate...
    Γûá Compile...
    Γûá Run
    Γûá Environment


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.1. Output: Test Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Test Mode

Selecting this option enters test mode

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + T]

 Notes
         In test mode, Guidelines displays the application windows as they will
         appear when the application is executing. This allows you to test the
         controls and windows before Generating and Compiling.

         Only the default behaviour of the controls is provided - no JOT code
         is executed in Test mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.2. Output: Options... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Options

Selecting this option allows the user to specify which types of file are
generated by default, by selecting them on the Code Generation Options dialog
box.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         The dialog also allows specification of various aspects of Guidelines
         behaviour while performing Generate/Compile/Run actions none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.3. Output: Generate... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Generate

Selecting this option allows you to generate the source files from the
Guidelines resources and the JOT code defined for your application.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + G]

 Notes
         When you select this option, the Code Generation Status dialog box is
         displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.4. Output: Compile... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Compile

Selecting this option causes Guidelines to compile the code you generated using
the Output: Generate menu option.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + C]

 Notes
         In order to generate code, Guidelines creates an OS/2 windowed session
         and executes the Make utility (specified in the Environment Selection
         dialog box) on the generated .MAK file.

         A window displays the results of the compilation so that you can
         verify that your application executable was created correctly.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.5. Output: Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Run

This option allows you to run the most recently compiled application as a
standalone program to verify that it behaves as you expected.

 Toolbar Icon

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + R]

 Notes
         This option will be disabled if the application is already running, or
         if the target is a DLL.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.7.6. Output: Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Output: Environment

This allows you to select the tools to use to build your application and their
command line options.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         Selecting this option displays the Select Environment dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8. The Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Menu

The Help Menu contains options which provide help on various aspects of using
Guidelines.

On-line context-sensitive help is available throughout Guidelines simply by
pressing F1 (or [CTRL + F1] in the Action Editor). The Help Menu provides you
with a means of getting general help or accessing the Help Index and table of
contents.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Help index
    Γûá Help contents
    Γûá General help
    Γûá Using help
    Γûá Product Information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8.1. Help: Help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Help Index

This option displays the index for the Guidelines help file.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8.2. Help: Help contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Help contents

This option displays the table of contents for the Guidelines help file.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8.3. Help: General help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: General Help

Selecting General Help displays overview level help information for Guidelines.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This selection displays general help information providing an overview
         of Guidelines as well as containing options for obtaining more
         detailed help should you require it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8.4. Help: Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Using Help

Selecting this option displays information on using the OS/2 Help Manager.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This is the standard help panel provided by OS/2, and is accordingly
         in the standard system style.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7.8.5. Help: Product Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Product Information

This option displays the Guidelines Product Information dialog box, which
contains copyright and version information on the copy of Guidelines you are
using.

 Toolbar Icon
         none.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8. Dialog Box Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dialog Box Reference

This section provides details of all the dialogs not specific to controls.

    Γûá Product Information
    Γûá Application Settings
    Γûá Application Directories
    Γûá Auto-Save
    Γûá Compiling...
    Γûá Confirmations...
    Γûá Customize Toolbars
    Γûá Environment Details
    Γûá Environment Paths
    Γûá Environment Selection
    Γûá Exit Guidelines
    Γûá Extensions...
    Γûá External File Groups
    Γûá External File Details
    Γûá Generate Code...
    Γûá Code Generation Options
    Γûá File Open
    Γûá Help Panel Details
    Γûá Help Panels
    Γûá Import Error
    Γûá JBA Worldwide Support Centres
    Γûá Message Boxes
    Γûá Message Details
    Γûá Print Windows
    Γûá Printer Setup
    Γûá Resource Details
    Γûá Resource Open
    Γûá Edit Resources
    Γûá Resource Selection
    Γûá Presentation Parameters
    Γûá Group/Tab Order
    Γûá Window List
    Γûá Window Settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.1. Product Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Product Information

The Product Information Dialog Box is used to display copyright, version and
modification level information about Guidelines.

In addition, it displays the Registration Number assigned to the copy of
Guidelines you are using.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

    displays a dialog listing the Support Centres worldwide for Guidelines

                 dismisses the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2. Application Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Application Settings

On this dialog box, you can enter the following information which defines your
application to Guidelines. These settings must be valid before code can be
generated.

    Γûá Application Title
    Γûá Copyright Message
    Γûá Main Window
    Γûá Main Source File

 The Options group allow specification of how the code is going to be generated
 using the following options:

    Γûá Generate in a DLL Option
    Γûá Generate code to use DLLs Option
    Γûá Non Windowed Application Option

 The Message File group allows tailoring of the generated message identifiers.
 If you are using multiple Guidelines applications in the same project, and do
 not want to have conflicting Message Box identifiers, you can specify the
 following for each GUI file:

    Γûá Generate in a DLL Option
    Γûá Generate code to use DLLs Option

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

           brings up the Action Editor This is used to write code for the
           actions which provide the functionality behind your application.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.1. Application Settings: Application Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the title which will appear in the OS/2 Window List for your
application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.2. Application Settings: Copyright Message ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the copyright message which Guidelines will automatically insert into
all text files generated for an application.

You should insert your company name and a copyright date along with any other
information which you want to appear in the message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.3. Application Settings: Main Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the name of the window which will be displayed as the main window for
your application. This will be the first window created when the application is
run.

Select the required name from the dropdown list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.4. Application Settings: Main Source File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the base name of the source modules that will be created for your
application. Guidelines automatically creates files with the appropriate
extensions when you select the Output: Generate... menu item.

Note:  This field is required, and should be a valid filename on the File
System you are running (minus any extension). The main source file for your
application normally has the same name as the application file. Change the name
here if your require it to be different.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.5. Application Settings: Generate in DLL Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish the code for this application to be generated as a
Dynamically Linked Library (DLL). This is useful if you wish to re-use the code
developed in this application from other applications, and promotes modular
design.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.6. Application Settings: Generate to use DLLs Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option to tell Guidelines to use DLL versions of the runtime
library. This greatly reduces the size of the executable, but requires
GUIRUN.DLL and GUICRT.DLL to distribute.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.7. Application Settings: Non Windowed Application Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this check-box indicates that the application to be generated does
not use the OS/2 Presentation Manager GUI.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.8. Application Settings: Application ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the prefix which is used on generated message IDs to avoid
naming conflicts.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.2.9. Application Settings: Numbered from ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the number from which message IDs are generated. Message
Boxes will be sequentially numbered, starting with this number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3. Application Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Application Directories

The Application Directories Dialog Box allows you to enter the directories you
wish Guidelines to use when it is loading, generating or saving the various
file types which make up a Guidelines application.

A different group of settings may be made for each application that is created,
and these are saved along with the application.

Locations for the following file types may be specified:

    Γûá GUI Files
    Γûá GUI Backup Files
    Γûá Resource Files
    Γûá Generated Source File
    Γûá Source Backup Files
    Γûá Executables

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              resets all paths to their default values, as specified in the
              Default Directories dialog. This option is useful when you wish
              to quickly set up the directory paths for code not created on
              your machine.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.

 Note:  The directories you select must already exist, ie. you must create them
 outside Guidelines


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.1. Application Directories: GUI Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the location where your application file (.GUI) will be stored by
Guidelines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.2. Application Directories: GUI Backup Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the directory where backup application files will be placed (updated
when you select Save from the File Menu, or automatically if the Auto-Save
feature is active).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.3. Application Directories: Resource Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the location where Guidelines looks to find resource files defined for
applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.4. Application Directories: Generated Source File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies where source files are generated.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.5. Application Directories: Source Backup Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the directory where backup copies of generated source files are kept
(updated each time you generate a new set).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.3.6. Application Directories: Final Executables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the directory where the generated executable files are
placed (those with a .DLL or a .EXE extension).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.4. Auto-Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Auto-Save

Activating the Auto-Save feature causes Guidelines to save your work to disk
periodically.

When the Auto-Save Active check box is ticked, the feature is active.

The Minutes edit box allows you to enter the period between saves, the default
duration being 10 minutes.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.4.1. Auto-Save: Active ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When checked, the Auto-Save feature is active (as described in the Auto-Save
dialog help).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.4.2. Auto-Save: Minutes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the interval at which Guidelines saves your work to disk.

By default, it is set to 10 minutes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Feature Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Feature

Please report the circumstances under which this dialog appeared to  Guidelines
technical support.

All 'features' should be documented.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.5. Compiling... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Compiling

This dialog displays the output of the various tools while they compile and
link the generated source files into a DLL or EXEcutable program.

This allows you to see any errors that might occur if your environment is
incorrectly configured, and to judge the progress of your compilation with the
Progress Indicator.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6. Confirmations... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Confirmations

This dialog allows you to specify the actions for which Guidelines prompts you
for confirmation. The following confirmations are available.

    Γûá Window Deletion
    Γûá Menu Deletion
    Γûá Control Deletion
    Γûá Group Deletion
    Γûá Presentation Parameter Deletion
    Γûá Resource Deletion
    Γûá Message Box Deletion
    Γûá Help Panel Deletion
    Γûá Code Module Deletion
    Γûá External File Group Deletion
    Γûá External File Deletion

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.1. Confirmations: Window Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to prompted before Guidelines will delete
windows.

If you select, the Only with children option, Guidelines will only prompt you
if the window has children.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.2. Confirmations: Menu Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a menu.

Select the Only with sub-items option if you wish Guidelines to prompt you only
if the menu has sub-items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.3. Confirmations: Control Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.4. Confirmations: Group Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.5. Confirmations: Presentation Parameter Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
presentation parameter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.6. Confirmations: Resource Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.7. Confirmations: Message Box Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
message box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.8. Confirmations: Help Panel Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a help
panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.9. Confirmations: Code Module Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a code
module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.10. Confirmations: External File Group Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
reference to an external file group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.6.11. Confirmations: External File Deletion ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to be prompted before Guidelines deletes a
reference to an external file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden> Credits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

You need help with this ?!?!


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7. Customize Toolbars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Customize Toolbars

This dialog provides a means to set up the appearance of the main Guidelines
window according to personal preferences.

Separate groups allow customisation of:

    Γûá the Editor Tool Bar
    Γûá the Controls Tool Bar
    Γûá and the Status Bar

 The actual settings are:

    Γûá Show Editor Toolbar
    Γûá Show Tracking
    Γûá Show Controls Toolbar
    Γûá Position
    Γûá Show Status Bar
    Γûá Controls List
    Γûá In Toolbar
    Γûá In Menu
    Γûá Menu Separator

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.1. Customize Toolbars: Show Editor Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this option is checked, the Editor Toolbar is displayed in the main
Guidelines window, and the Show Tracking option may be selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.2. Customize Toolbars: Show Tracking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option causes the tracking (size and position) of the current object to be
displayed in the Properties Bar

It is only available when the Show Editor Toolbar option is checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.3. Customize Toolbars: Show Controls Toolbar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When selected, the Controls Toolbar is displayed and the placing of the toolbar
may be set with the Position options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.4. Customize Toolbars: Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The first four options

    ΓûáLeft
    ΓûáRight
    ΓûáTop
    ΓûáBottom

 attach the Controls Toolbar to the specified edge within the main Guidelines
 window.

 The Floating option allows the toolbar to be placed anywhere on the desktop,
 and it is not restricted to remaining within the main Guidelines window.

 The ability to select position is only available when the Show Toolbar option
 is checked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.5. Customize Toolbars: Show Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When this option is checked, the Status Bar is displayed across the bottom of
the main Guidelines window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.6. Customize Toolbars: Controls List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Controls list displays the name and icon associated with each of the types
of control that Guidelines is aware of.

The options

    Γûá In Toolbar
    Γûá In Menu
    Γûá Menu Separator

 apply to the selected item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.7. Customize Toolbars: In Toolbar Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this option is checked, the selected control will appear in the Controls
Toolbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.8. Customize Toolbars: In Menu Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this option is checked, the selected control will appear in the Create Menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.7.9. Customize Toolbars: Menu Separator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Not entirely sure...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8. Environment Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Environment Details

The Environment Details Dialog Box allows you to enter or edit the details of a
new or existing development environment.

Each environment has a descriptive Name and a Target System associated with it.

Different settings may be entered for generating executable files (.EXE) and
dynamically linked libraries. For each, the following can be specified:

    Γûá Compiler Command Line
    Γûá Linker Command Line
    Γûá Libraries to be linked

 Edit fields are also provided to change the command lines of the following
 tools:

    Γûá Make Program
    Γûá Import Librarian
    Γûá Resource Compiler
    Γûá Resource Linker
    Γûá Message Compiler
    Γûá Help Compiler

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

             displays the Environment Paths dialog box allowing you to enter
             environment variables required by the development environment's
             tools.

             accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.1. Environment Details: Environment Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the name you wish this development environment to be known by within
Guidelines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.2. Environment Details: Target System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.3. Environment Details: Compiler Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the compiler, including the flags used to select the desired compile
options.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.4. Environment Details: Linker Command Line ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
call the linker.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.5. Environment Details: Libraries to be linked ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the names of the library files to be linked with your code
to form the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.6. Environment Details: Make Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line which Guidelines uses to invoke the Make
program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.7. Environment Details: Import Librarian ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the Import Librarian.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.8. Environment Details: Resource Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the Resource Compiler (used to compile resources to a binary .RES filr
for subsequent linking into the EXEcutable program).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.9. Environment Details: Resource Linker ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the Resource Linker (used to link compiled resources into the EXEcutable
program).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.10. Environment Details: Message Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the Message Compiler (creates message files from text files).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.8.11. Environment Details: Help Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field contains the command line placed in the MAKE file, which is used to
invoke the Help Compiler creates help files from tagged text files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.9. Environment Paths ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Environment Paths

This dialog used to enter any additional path information which is required to
be supplied to your development environment in the form of environment
variables.

Up to eight environment variables may be entered in the Path entry fields.

These environment variables will be set each time you compile and link your
application. They are local to that session, so will not affect the settings in
your CONFIG.SYS file.

To use the settings which are in your CONFIG.SYS file instead of any placed
here, check the Use CONFIG.SYS paths box.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

             accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             displays this help panel.

 Exiting this dialog returns you to the Environment Details dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.9.1. Environment Paths: Path Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The actual text in these entry fields will depend on the environment you are
configuring.

For example, an OS/2 2.x environment using the CSet++ Tools might have the
following settings:

 COMSPEC=H:\OS2\CMD.EXE

 PATH=.;E:\TOOLKT20\OS2BIN;E:\IBMCPP\BIN

 DPATH=.;E:\TOOLKT20\IPFC;E:\IBMCPP\LOCALE;E:\IBMCPP\HELP;E:\IBMCPP\SYS

 INCLUDE=.;E:\TOOLKT20\CPLUS\OS2H;E:\IBMCPP\INCLUDE;E:\GUIDEV2E\GUE

 LIB=.;E:\TOOLKT20\OS2LIB;E:\IBMCPP\LIB;E:\GUIDEV2E\GUE

 IPFC=E:\TOOLKT20\IPFC

 TMP=E:\IBMCPP\TMP


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.9.2. Environment Paths: Use CONFIG.SYS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If, rather than using the environment settings in this dialog, you'd prefer to
use the global ones set in your CONFIG.SYS file, select this checkbox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.10. Environment Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Environment Selection

The Environment Selection Dialog Box is used to select the environment for
which Guidelines should generate code and create programs.

It may also be used to Add, Edit and Delete these environment settings.

A list of the currently available environments is presented, and they are
managed with the following push buttons:

             causes the highlighted entry in the list to become the currently
             selected environment.

             displays the Environment Details dialog with empty fields,
             allowing you to enter information for a new environment, which is
             then added to the list.

             displays the Environment Details dialog. This allows editing of
             the settings for the highlighted environment.

             causes the highlighted environment to be deleted. You will be
             prompted before the settings are actually deleted.

             dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.10.1. Environment Selection: Select Environment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pressing this button causes the entry, which is highlighted in the list, to
become the current environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.10.2. Environment Selection: Environment List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains all the environments currently known to Guidelines.

Double-clicking on an entry has the same effect as the Edit button and causes
the Environment Details dialog to be selected.

The highlighted entry becomes the current environment when the Select button is
pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.11. Exit Guidelines ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Exit Guidelines

The Exit Guidelines Dialog Box is used to verify that you wish to exit
Guidelines.

Select the Save Option to save global settings.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.11.1. Exit Guidelines :Save Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this check-box will ensure that any changes you have made to global
settings, for example, Presentation Parameters, will be saved to the Guidelines
initialization file and retrieved the next time you load Guidelines.

If you deselect this check box, global settings will not be saved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.12. Extensions... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Extensions

This dialog gives a list of the .GUE files which contain the extensions to
Guidelines. The Extension List provides a list of all the extensions Guidelines
found, along with whether they were loaded correctly.

Selecting a list item causes its details to be displayed in the Details group,
which gives the Directory path where the extension was found, along with its
Version and Modification level.

This dialog allows you to ensure all extensions are compatible with the version
of Guidelines you are running. If not you will need to contact your vendor for
an update.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.12.1. Extensions List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This scrollable list shows all the extensions that Guidelines found and
attempted to load.

The first column gives the file name, the second the version/modification
level, and the third gives the load status.

If the load status is not "OK" it means you have a control which is
incompatible with the version of Guidelines you are running.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.13. External File Groups ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

External File Groups

The External File Groups Dialog Box is used to specify the external libraries
required to be linked to your application's source code.

A list is displayed of those currently known to Guidelines

Libraries may be added, edited or deleted using the following options from this
dialog box.

             displays the External File Details dialog which allows you to
             enter information for a new external library.

             the selected message is displayed for editing in the External File
             Details dialog box.

             Selecting this push button allows you to delete the reference to
             the currently-selected external library. If you have checked the
             Confirm on external library delete option in the Confirmation
             Options dialog box, you will be prompted before deletion is
             performed.

             dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.13.1. External File Groups: File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list of all external file groups known to Guidelines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14. External File Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

External File Details

The External Library Details Dialog Box is used to detail the interfaces to
external libraries required by your application.

The following information is required to be entered for each external library
specified.

Two edit fields specify the Name and Description for the control/group.

TO BE DONE...

 Γûá Name

 Enter the descriptive name for this library/include file.

 Γûá Import Library

 Enter here the name of the library file required to be linked to build your
 application's executable. If the file is not present in the path specified by
 the LIB environment variable, enter the full pathname for this file;
 otherwise, enter just the name of the library file.

 Γûá Include file

 Enter the name of the header file containing the prototypes of the imported
 functions. This file will be included in any source files generated by
 Guidelines. If the file is not present in the path specified by the INCLUDE
 environment variable, enter the full pathname of this file; otherwise, enter
 just the name of the include file.

 Imported functions may be added, edited or deleted using the fields in the
 Imported Functions group of controls.

 If a function name is selected in the list box, its name will appear in the
 Function Name field. This field can be used in conjunction with the following
 push buttons in the control group.

 Γûá Add

 Enter a new function name in the Function Name field and select this push
 button to add the function to the list of imported functions.

 Γûá Rename

 Enter a new function name in the Function Name field and select this push
 button to rename the currently-selected function. This push button is not
 available is no function name is selected.

 Γûá Delete

 Selecting this push button allows you to delete the reference to the
 currently-selected imported function. If you have checked the Confirm on
 imported function delete option in the Confirmation Options dialog box, you
 will be prompted whether you are sure you wish to delete the imported function
 reference.

 If you select Yes, the reference will be deleted; otherwise, the reference
 will remain.

 Once you have specified the imported functions contained in this external
 library, select OK to accept the information and return to the External
 Libraries/Include Files dialog box.

 Select Cancel to ignore any changes and return to the External
 Libraries/Include Files dialog box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.1. External File Details: Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.2. External File Details: Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.3. External File Details: File List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.4. External File Details: File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.5. External File Details: Target ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.6. External File Details: Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.14.7. External File Details: Load Structure ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.15. Generate Code... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Generate Code

This dialog allows you to specify which files you wish to generate from your
current Guidelines application. and to start the generation.

A File List displays the list of files to be generated, and shows progress
during the generation process. It also allows generation of specific files to
be disabled.

When generation is complete, a message will be displayed, informing you of the
status of the generation.

The dialog contains the following push buttons:

              starts the generation of the selected files.

              cancels the generation of code.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.15.1. Code Generation: Files List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list shows all the files that may be generated for your application.

By default all files in the file list are selected, however, you may choose to
deselect individual files by clicking on their names with the LMB. As you click
on files, the highlight is removed from their names to indicate that they will
not be generated.

Note:  If you choose not to generate certain files, be aware that your
application may not compile and link correctly. Guidelines is unable to check
that extra modules supplied and/or modified by you outside of its development
environment are syntactically correct.

As each file is being generated, it will be indicated by an arrow () in the
list box. Once generation is complete for the file, the arrow will be replaced
by a tick mark. If a problem occurs during generation of the file, a warning
message will be displayed and the file will be marked with a cross (X) to
indicate an error has occurred.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16. Code Generation Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Code Generation Options

This dialog allows you to specify which files are generated by Guidelines,
which files are saved, and the behaviour during the Generate, Compile and Run
phases.

A number of checkboxes in the Output Defaults group specify which files are
generated by default.

Additionally, the following Options may be specified:

    Γûá Autosave before generate
    Γûá Backup generated files
    Γûá Delete generated files
    Γûá Delete intermediate files
    Γûá Generate IDs File
    Γûá No Comments
    Γûá Auto Generate
    Γûá Auto Compile

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.1. Code Generation Options: Defaults ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this group of check boxes to specify which files to generate by default.
This option is useful if you are supplying some files independently of
Guidelines.

Output Defaults

Select one or more the following options to specify which files you want
generated by default.

 Γûá Source files (.CPP)

 Check this box if you wish C++ source code files to be generated.

 Γûá Include files (.HPP)

 Check this box if you wish C++ header files to be generated.

 Γûá Resource script (.RC)

 Check this box if you wish to generate resource scripts.

 Γûá Dialog templates (.DLG)

 Check this box if you wish dialog template files to be generated.

 Γûá Message file (.TXT)

 Check this box to generate text files from which to generate .MSG files.

 Γûá Help file (.IPF)

 Check this box if you wish to generate files for use by the Information
 Presentation Facility.

 Γûá Linker script (.LNK)

 Check this box if you wish to generate files for use by the link command.

 Γûá Linker definitions (.DEF)

 Check this box if you wish to generate a module definition file for use by the
 linker.

 Γûá Make file (.MAK)

 Check this box to automatically generate a Make file for this application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.2. Code Generation Options: Autosave before generate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option will cause Guidelines to automatically save your
application before starting the code generation process.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.3. Code Generation Options: Backup generated files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option ensures that existing generated files are backed up before
new files are generated.. The files are renamed so that the last character of
the extension is a dollar character ($).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.4. Code Generation Options: Delete generated files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to erase the files it generated whilst
building the application, thus reducing disk storage requirements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.5. Code Generation Options: Delete intermediate files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to erase any intermediate or temporary
files it may have created once they are no longer needed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.6. Code Generation Options: Generate IDs File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to generate a header file which contains
just the control IDs for the application. This is useful for older resource
compilers which cannot handle anything other than #define statements in header
files.

The file has the same base name as other files generated for the application
but with an extension of .IDS


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.7. Code Generation Options: No Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, Guidelines places numerous comments in the source files it creates,
describing what the program is doing at each stage.

If desired, this option may be checked to disable the generation of comments.
This has the advantage of reducing the size of the source files, at the expense
of readability.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.8. Code Generation Options: Auto Generate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to automatically begin to generate
source code as soon as the Generate option is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.9. Code Generation Options: Auto Compile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to automatically compile the application
when it has generated the source.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.16.10. Code Generation Options: Auto Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking this option causes Guidelines to automatically run the application
when compilation has completed successfully.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17. File Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17.1. File Open: Filename ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17.2. File Open: Type of file: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17.3. File Open: Drive: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17.4. File Open: File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.17.5. File Select: Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Select

This dialog is used in several situations where a file or filename needs to be
selected.

It is the standard dialog provided by the OS/2 system, and behaves in the same
way as in other applications.

The filename: entry field shows the name of the currently selected file.
Initially, it will often be a "wildcard" which shows the extension (and thus
type) of the filename to be selected.

The Drive: combo box allows selection of a drive. The drop down portion
displays the drives currently recognized by the system.

The File: list box shows all the filenames in the selected directory. In
situations where a file is to be selected for reading information into
Guidelines, a file from this list may be selected by double clicking on it.
Where a new file is to be created, the contents of the list are grayed out, to
show names that already exist (and hence cannot be used).

The Directory: list box allows navigation of the directory tree, to select a
directory. Double-clicking on a directory selects it, and causes the files
within the directory to be displayed in the file list box mentioned above.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18. Help Panel Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Panel Details

This dialog is used to enter the details for a help panel.

The Name is the name by which the panel is referenced within Guidelines The
Help Index is what appears as the Help Index for this panel and the Index Type
determines the level of index tag.

The Help Title is the text that appears in the panels title bar, which is also
shown in the Table of Contents entry, and the Help Text is the actual help text
which is presented to the user.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              which dismisses the dialog, accepting any changes.

              which dismisses the dialog, ignoring any changes.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.1. Help Details: Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field contains the name by which the panel is referenced within
Guidelines  and your programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.2. Help Details: Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text you wish to appear in the help index for this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.3. Help Details: Help Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text you wish to appear in the help panel's title. This text is also
used in the help contents panel for your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.4. Help Details: Help Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter the text you want displayed for this help panel.

The text will be compiled with the help compiler, so may contain tags to
enhance the visual .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.5. Help Details: Visible ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this checkbox is selected, the generated panel will appear in the Table of
Contents. Otherwise the hide attribute will prevent it being accessible this
way.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.6. Help Details: Index Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 No Index Entry.
              Prevents this panel from appearing in the index

 Primary Index.
              Will place an index entry with the Text specified in the primary
              index

 Secondary Index.
              Will place an index entry with the Text specified in the
              secondary index


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.18.7. Help Details: Link ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.19. Help Panels ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Panels

This dialog is used to manage the list of help panels for your application.
This dialog box displays a list of the help panels available, with the
following push buttons to allow you to manage these panels.

              displays a blank Help Details dialog box so that you can enter
              the required information for your help panel.

              displays the Help Details dialog box containing the existing
              information for this help panel.

              This push button is available only when a panel is selected in
              the list box.

              prompts to confirm deletion of the selected message if you have
              checked the Help Panel option in the Confirmation Options dialog
              box; otherwise, the message box is deleted without comment.

              This push button is available only when a panel is selected in
              the list box.

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.19.1. Help Panels: Panel List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains all the help panels currently known to Guidelines

Double cicking on an item brings up the Help Details dialog, allowing the
editing of these details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.20. Import Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.21. JBA Worldwide Support Centres ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                        Γûá JBA Worldwide Support Centres Γûá

This dialog contains a list of the JBA Support Centres around the world. If you
require support, contact the office nearest to you.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.22. Message Boxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Boxes

This dialog is used to display a list of messages available for editing. The
following push buttons allow you to manage these messages.

              displays the Message Details dialog box, allowing you to enter
              information for a new message.

              the selected message is displayed for editing in the Message
              Details dialog box.

              This push button is available only when a message is selected in
              the list box.

              prompts to confirm deletion of the selected message if you have
              checked the Message Box option in the Confirmation Options dialog
              box; otherwise, the message box is deleted without comment.

              This push button is available only when a message is selected in
              the list box.

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.22.1. Message Boxes: Message List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains all the messages currently available to Guidelines

Double cicking on an item brings up the Message Details dialog, allowing the
editing of these details.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23. Message Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Details

This dialog is used to enter the details of an application-defined message box.

Edit Fields are provided to enter the Name which identifies the box and the
Message Text to be displayed in it.

The Help Panel Name drop-down list box associates a help panel with the box,
and the Buttons and Default Button drop-down list boxes determine the
arrangement of push buttons.

One of the default system icons may be placed in the box with the Icon selector
and the following styles can be specified:

 Γûá Help Button
 Γûá Moveable
 Γûá System Modal

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              which dismisses the dialog, accepting any changes.

              which dismisses the dialog, ignoring any changes.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.1. Message Details: Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field contains the name by which the resource is referenced within
Guidelines  and your programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.2. Message Details: Message Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is where the descriptive text to be presented to the user is entered.

This text is word-wrapped by default. If a word is too big to fit on one line,
the start of the word is not wrapped to the next line, but remains next to the
text it follows, and the word is split at the box boundary.

If more than two lines are required to display the text, the height of the
message box is increased up to two thirds the height of the screen, but no
more.

The minimum height is enough to display two lines of text, and the minimum
width is enough to display 40 characters (of average width).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.3. Message Details: Help Panel Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you have checked the Help Button Style option, this selector allows the
selection of a help panel to display when help is requested from the message
panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.4. Message Details: Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this dropdown list box to select the combination of buttons to be displayed
on the message box.

Possible combinations are:

 Γûá OK
 Γûá OK + Cancel
 Γûá Retry + Cancel
 Γûá Abort + Retry + Cancel
 Γûá Yes + No
 Γûá Yes + No + Cancel
 Γûá Enter
 Γûá Enter + Cancel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.5. Message Details: Default Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use this dropdown list box to select which button is the default selection when
the message box is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.6. Message Details: Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

To be completed when system icons available...

Select a system icon to display on the message box, from the following list.

 None          Don't display a system icon.

 Information   Display the standard informational system icon.

 Warning       Display the standard warning system icon.

 Error         Display the standard error system icon.

 Question      Display the standard question system icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.7. Message Details: Help Button Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option determines whether a help button appears on the box, allowing
further information on the message to be accessed via the help system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.8. Message Details: Moveable Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option determines whether the message box is moveable.

The box is displayed with a title bar and system menu containing Move, Close,
and Task Manager choices.

This may be useful in allowing the user to move the message box if it covers
all or part of an application window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.23.9. Message Details: System Modal Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option determines whether the message box is system modal.

By default a message box is application modal, allowing user interaction with
other tasks in the system. Check this option if the message is required to be
system modal, that it, no other applications may be selected until this message
has been acknowledged.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.24. Print Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Windows

To be written.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.25. Printer Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printer Setup

To be written.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.26. Resource Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Resource Details

This dialog is used to enter or edit the required information for a resource
used by your application.

The Name field contains the name by which the resource is referenced within
Guidelines

The Path field contains the full path, including file name, of the actual file
containing the resource.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              which dismisses the dialog, accepting any changes.

              which dismisses the dialog, ignoring any changes.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.26.1. Resource Details: Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field contains the name by which the resource is referenced within
Guidelines and your programs.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.26.2. Resource Details: Path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Path field contains the full path, including file name, of the actual file
containing the resource.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27. Resource Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Standard File Dialog with res sel bits.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27.1. Resource Open: Open filename: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27.2. Resource Open: Type of file: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27.3. Resource Open: Drive: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27.4. Resource Open: File: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.27.5. Resource Open: Directory: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.28. Edit Resources ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit Resources

This dialog is used to select resources for use within Guidelines

If a resource in the list is highlighted, it is displayed as a scaled image in
the viewing window.

The following actions are available:

              opens up a File Selection Dialog and allows you to select an Icon
              (.ICO), Pointer (.PTR) or Bitmap (.BMP) file, which can then be
              referenced within Guidelines

              brings up the Resource Details dialog for the resource
              highlighted in the list box.

              This allows editing of the name by which Guidelines will
              reference the resource, and the name of the file which contains
              the resource.

              causes the highlighted resource to be removed from the list box,
              and therefore inaccesible to Guidelines. It will NOT delete the
              original resource.

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.28.1. Edit Resources: Resource List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains all the resources recognized by Guidelines

If a resource in the list is highlighted, it is displayed as a scaled image in
the adjacent viewing window.

Double cicking on an item brings up the Resource Details


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.29. Resource Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Resource Selection

This dialog allows you to select a visual resource (such as an icon, bitmap or
pointer) to associate with your control or menu option.

The list shows the names of all the resources available to your application and
a preview box which displays a scaled picture of the currently selected
resource.

Resources are added to the list with the Edit Resources dialog, which is
accessed from the Edit: Resources... menu option on the main menu bar.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              which dismisses the dialog, accepting any selection.

              which dismisses the dialog, ignoring any selection.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.29.1. Resource Selection: Resource List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list contains all the resources recognized by Guidelines

If a resource in the list is highlighted, it is displayed as a scaled image in
the adjacent viewing window.

Double cicking on an item selects that item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30. Presentation Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation Parameters

This dialog is used to select Presentation Parameters, the Fonts and Colours,
to be used for the control.

The left hand side of the dialog provides a selection list for the parameter to
be edited, and a sample to demonstrate the values chosen.

The right hand side of the dialog changes, to reflect the type of parameter
chosen.

When selecting the font to be used, a Fonts list appears, containing a list of
the fonts available on the system. Additionally, the Size and Style can be
specified in the Font Options group.

When selecting a colour to be used, a Colour Wheel allows visual selection of a
colour. The numerical values corresponding to the selection are displayed in
the entry fields in the Colour Options group, in either HSB or RGB form,
depending on the setting of the radio buttons.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              resets the selected parameter to its default values.

              resets all parameters to their default values.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.1. Presentation Parameters: Parameter List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list is used to select the Presentation Parameter you wish to change.

The first entry is a font selection and the remaining entries allow selection
of a colour for the specified portion of the window.

When the settings for a particular parameter have changed, a tick mark appears
alongside it's entry in the parameters list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.2. Presentation Parameters: Clear (and Clear All) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

When the settings for a particular parameter have changed, a tick mark appears
alongside it in the parameters list.

The Clear button resets the parameter value for the current selection back to
its default value.

The Clear All button does the same, except that it applies to all the
parameters in the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.3. Presentation Parameters: Colour Wheel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The colour wheel is used to select colour values for the current parameter.

The crosshairs on the wheel itself determine the colour selected, and the
slider on the adjacent colour bar determines its intensity.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.4. Presentation Parameters: RGB/HSB Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The RGB (Red/Green/Blue) values displayed reflect the relative intensities of
the primary components which make up the selected colour.

The HSB (Hue/Saturation/Brightness) provides the same information, but with
alternative units.

The radio buttons determine which of the two is displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.5. Presentation Parameters: Pure Colours ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Normally, if PM cannot display a colour exactly, it will dither colours
together to approximate that colour.

However, when this box is checked, only 'pure' colours are displayed for
selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.6. Presentation Parameters: Font Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Three styles are selectable via these check-boxes. These are effects which are
applied to the selected font.

 Γûá Outline causes an outline version of the font to be used.

 Γûá Strikeout causes a horizontal bar to be placed through the font.

 Γûá Underline causes a horizontal bar to be placed below the font.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.7. Presentation Parameters: Fonts List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Fonts are chosen from this list, which displays the names of all the fonts
which Guidelines found on the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.30.8. Presentation Parameters: Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This combo box is used to enter the point size of the selected font, ie how
high it is.

If one of the preset values does not suffice, a value can be typed into the
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.31. Group/Tab Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group/Tab Order

This dialog is used to modify the group/tab order of controls in a window.

When the dialog box is displayed, it presents a list of the controls in the
window.

Modifications are made to the group/tab order by first selecting a control to
change. When a control is selected, the following push buttons may be used to
modify the group/tab order.

Movement push buttons.

        Move to top (start) of tab order list.

        Move up one position (earlier) in tab order list.

        Move down one position (later) in tab order list.

        Move to bottom (end) of tab order list.

 Additional push buttons.

             Selecting this push button enables tab order mode.

             In this mode, the Order push button is replaced by a Done push
             button, and you can select the tab order you require by
             double-clicking the controls in the list in the order you want
             them arranged.

             When you are happy with the tab order, you return to normal
             group/tab order mode by selecting the Done push button. If you
             choose to order all of the controls, Guidelines automatically
             returns to the normal group/tab order mode when you have selected
             the last one.

             Selecting this push button marks the currently selected control as
             a tabstop.

             Selecting this push button marks the currently selected control as
             the start of a group. If this control was already in the middle of
             a larger group, the larger group is split into two.

 General push buttons.

             displays this help panel.

             discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.31.1. Group/Tab Order: Controls List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The list of controls provides the following information:

 Γûá whether they are a tabstop (indicated by ).

 Γûá the arrangement of groups (indicated by lines).

 Γûá the type of control (indicated by the Tool Bar button used to create the
 control);

 Γûá the name of the control, and

 Γûá the control text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.32. Window List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window List

This dialog displays a hierarchical list (tree) of the windows currently
defined in your application.

If you select one of the windows in the list by double-clicking on it, the
appropriate details dialog box will be displayed for the selection.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.32.1. Window List: Tree ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list shows the windows defined for your application. An appropriate
details dialog is brought up when the item is selected (by double-clicking).

The ownership relationship is shown by the tree.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33. Window Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window Settings

This dialog allows you to specify the settings for application windows
displayed by Guidelines. You may change information for the following options.

    Γûá Grid Colour
    Γûá Grid Spacing
    Γûá Show Grid
    Γûá Snap To Grid
    Γûá Lock Position

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33.1. Window Settings: Grid Colour ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a colour for the grid from the dropdown list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33.2. Window Settings: Grid Spacing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The two fields allow you to enter the Horizontal and Vertical spacing of the
grid, in pixels.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33.3. Window Settings: Show Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you the grid to be displayed during creation and editing of
application windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33.4. Window Settings: Snap To Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish objects within the window to automatically snap to
the nearest grid line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.33.5. Window Settings: Lock Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish to automatically lock the positions of controls when
they are created in this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.34. General Styles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following 'Styles' are common across a number of controls, so are defined
outside of a specific dialog.

They are:

    Γûá Visible style

    Γûá Disabled style

    Γûá Tabstop style

    Γûá Start of Group style


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.34.1. Visible style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this style to make the control visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.34.2. Disabled style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this style to initially disable the control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.34.3. Tabstop style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this style makes the control a tabstop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.34.4. Start of Group style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this style makes the control the first control in a group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.35. General Entry Fields ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following parameters are common across a number of controls, so are defined
outside of a specific dialog.

They are:

    Γûá Name field

    Γûá Text field

    Γûá Help Panel field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.35.1. Name field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Name field contains the name this control is known by within Guidelines.

Each time a control is created,  Guidelines creates a unique default name which
appears in this field. You can leave this as it is, or change it to be
something more meaningful within the context of your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.35.2. Text field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Text field contains the text to be displayed on the control.

The default is the word "text", but you will almost always want to change this
for your application. If you don't want text to be displayed because it is
inappropriate, simply clear the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.35.3. Help Panel field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Panel field allows the selection of a Help Panel to be associated with
this control.

Association is by name, and the names of previously defined Help Panels are
displayed in the combo box. Choose one of these, or directly type in a name and
create the Help Panel later.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36. Button Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button Details

This dialog allows you to fully specify the button control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies a Help Panel to be associated with the button.

The Message Type group selects the type of message the button will generate,
and the Button Type specifies the particular variant of the button control to
create.

Additionally, a number of Style Flags can be set, which refine the behaviour of
the button control:

    Γûá Default
    Γûá No Cursor Select
    Γûá No Focus
    Γûá No Border
    Γûá Autosize
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Start of Group
    Γûá Tabstop

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              causes the Resource Selection dialog box to appear, allowing the
              selection of an image to be placed on the button.

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         brings up the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your button.

         erases the current button control and returns to the Guidelines edit
         screen. It has the same effect as selecting a control or window and
         pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.1. Button Details: Message Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Type

Select one of the following values to indicate the message type generated by
this control.

 Γûá Normal

 A normal notification message is sent to the owner window when it has a
 command to report or when a keystroke has been translated by an accelerator
 table into a notification message.

 Γûá System Command

 An application that has a window with a System menu can change the size and
 position of that window by sending system commands. The system commands are
 usually generated by the user selecting commands from the system menu. This
 setting allows an application to emulate the user action by sending a System
 command message to the window

 Γûá Help Request

 A help message is identical to a normal notification message but a help
 message implies that the application should respond by displaying help
 information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.2. Button Details: Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button Type

Select one of the following values to indicate the type of button this control
should be.

 Γûá Radio Button

 Selecting this option changes the button type to Radio Button. If you check
 the Auto option, the control will be an auto-radio button.

 Γûá Check Box

 Selecting this option makes the control a Check Box. Selecting Auto makes it
 an automatic check box.

 Γûá Three-State Check Box

 Selecting this option makes the control a 3- State Button. If Auto is checked,
 it will become an automatic button.

 Γûá Push Button

 This option makes the control a push button control.

 Γûá User Button

 Selecting this option makes the control a user button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.3. Button Details: Default Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Default Button

Check this option if you want this button to be selected automatically when the
user of your application presses the [ENTER] key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.4. Button Details: No Cursor Select Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

No Cursor Select

Check this option if you want a control that does not receive the focus when it
is selected. This enables the cursor to remain on another control for entry of
information, rather than moving to this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.5. Button Details: No Focus Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

No Focus

Check this option if you want this control to be disabled.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.6. Button Details: No Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

No Border

Check this option if you want this control to be displayed without a border,


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.36.7. Button Details: Autosize Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.37. Combo Box Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Combo Box Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a combo box control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the combo box.

The Type group selects the type of combo box to be used, and the DBCS group
specifies how multi-byte character sets will be handled.

Additionally, a number of Style Flags can be set, which refine the behaviour of
the combo box control:

    Γûá Auto Tab
    Γûá Horizontal Scroll
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Start of Group
    Γûá Disabled

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your control.

         erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the same
         effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.37.1. Combo Box Details: Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

From this group, choose the type of combo box you wish to create:

 Γûá Simple

 This option selects a simple combo box control. Both the entry field and list
 box components are always visible. The text in the entry field is completed by
 extending the text of the entry field with the closest match from the list
 box.

 Γûá Drop Down

 This option selects a drop down combo box. This is similar to the simple
 version, but the list box is hidden until the user requests it.

 Γûá Drop Down List

 This option selects a drop down list combo box. The entry field is replaced by
 a static control which displays the current list box selection. The user must
 explicitly display the list box in order to make alternative selections.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.37.2. Combo Box Details: Auto Tab Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.37.3. Combo Box Details: Horz Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check the Horz Scroll checkbox if you wish the combo box to have a horizontal
scrollbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.37.4. Combo Box Details: DBCS Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the options in this group to indicate how this entry field will
support a double-byte character set encoding scheme.

 Γûá Any

 The control text may contain a mixture of SBCS and DBCS characters, however
 the conversion process may cause converted data to overrun the target field.

 Γûá SBCS

 If this option is checked, the control text is purely single- byte.

 Γûá DBCS

 If this option is selected, the text will be purely double- byte.

 Γûá Mixed

 If this option is selected the control text may contain a mixture of SBCS and
 DBCS characters, with an appropriate algorithm being used to prevent converted
 data overrunning the target field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.38. Custom Control Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Custom Control Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a custom control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the control.

Because the control, by definition, doesn't have a predefined Window Class, you
enter this in the Window Class Name field.

Additionally, a number of Style Flags can be set, which refine the behaviour of
the custom control:

    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Start of Group
    Γûá Disabled

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your control.

         erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the same
         effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.38.1. Custom Control: Window Class Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The window class name identifies the new custom window class. The name is a
character string, and must be unique within the system.

This information is not required for the standard system controls, as these are
registered when the system starts up. It is only required because the the
custom control is, by definition, not known to the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39. Entry Field Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Entry Field Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of an entry field
control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the entry field.

The Alignment group selects the way text is aligned in the field, and the DBCS
group specifies how muli-byte character sets will be handled.

The Edit Styles group contains a number of Style Flags which can be set to
refine the behaviour of the entry field control:

    Γûá Margin
    Γûá Auto Scroll
    Γûá Read Only
    Γûá Unreadable
    Γûá Auto Tab
    Γûá Command
    Γûá Auto Size
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Start of Group
    Γûá Tabstop

 The Max Length field determines the maximum length of the text which the Entry
 Field will accept.

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your control.

         erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the same
         effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.1. Entry Field Details: DBCS Support ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the options in this group to indicate how this entry field will
support a double-byte character set encoding scheme.

 Γûá Any

 The control text may contain a mixture of SBCS and DBCS characters, however
 the conversion process may cause converted data to overrun the target field.

 Γûá SBCS

 If this option is checked, the control text is purely single- byte.

 Γûá DBCS

 If this option is selected, the text will be purely double- byte.

 Γûá Mixed

 If this option is selected the control text may contain a mixture of SBCS and
 DBCS characters, with an appropriate algorithm being used to prevent converted
 data overrunning the target field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.2. Entry Field Details: Text Alignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the text alignment for this control from the following options.

 Γûá Left Aligned

 Select this option to align the text at the left of the control.

 Γûá Centered

 Select this option to align the text in the centre of this control.

 Γûá Right Aligned

 Select this option to align the text at the right hand side of the control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.3. Entry Field Details: Margin Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the entry field will be drawn with a border around it,
and with a margin around the editable text.

The margin is half a character wide and half a character high.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.4. Entry Field Details: Auto Horz Scroll Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the entry field will automatically scroll horizontally
by one third the width of the window when the cursor reaches its right-most
side.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.5. Entry Field Details: Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the information in the field cannot be changed by the
application user, and is used for display only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.6. Entry Field Details: Unreadable Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the entry field text will not be displayed (e.g. for
passwords). Instead an asterisk will be displayed for each character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.7. Entry Field Details: Auto Tab Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the effect of a [Tab] key is generated (move to the
next field) when this entry field is filled by adding a character to the end of
the text.

Inserting or replacing a character in the middle of the text does not have this
effect however.

This style is normally used with fixed length, non-scrollable fields that are
filled completely.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.8. Entry Field Details: Command Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, a command entry field is created. This information is
used by the Help Manager to provide command help if the user requests help for
this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.9. Entry Field Details: Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

With this style active, the text will be sized to ensure the contents fit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.39.10. Entry Field Details: Maximum Length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Max Length field determines the maximum length of the text which the Entry
Field will accept.

This corresponds to the maximum length allowable for the Text property.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40. Frame Window Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Frame Window Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a frame window or
dialog window.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the frame.

Two groups of radio buttons allow the Type of window, and Border Style to be
specified.

The Frame Controls group specifies which of the following controls are to be
associated with the frame:

    Γûá Title
    Γûá Min/Max/Hide
    Γûá System Menu
    Γûá Application Menu
    Γûá Scroll Bars

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

             causes the Resource Selection dialog box to appear, allowing the
             selection of an icon to be associated with the window.

             brings up the Frame Window Options dialog and allows more
             specialized options to be specified.

             brings up the Window Settings dialog. From here you specify how
             the window will be edited within Guidelines

        brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
        Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
        the window.

        invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
        which provide the functionality behind your control.

        erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the same
        effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL] key.

             accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

             displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.1. Frame Details: Title. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this control if you wish your window to have a title at the top
(default).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.2. Frame Details: Min/Max/Hide Controls. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Γûá Minimize Button

 Select this control if you wish to be able to minimize this window (default).

 Γûá Maximize Button

 Select this control if you wish to be able to maximize this window (default).

 Γûá Hide Button

 Select this control if you wish to be able to hide this window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.3. Frame Details: System Menu Control. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this control if you would like to be able to manipulate this window
using options on the system menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.4. Frame Details: Application Menu Control. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this control if you will be creating an application menu for this
window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.5. Frame Details: Scroll Bar Controls. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Γûá Vertical Scroll Bar

 Select this control if you require the information displayed in this window's
 client area to be scrolled up and down.

 Γûá Horizontal Scroll Bar

 Select this control if you require the information displayed in this window's
 client area to be scrolled left and right.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.6. Frame Details: Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following types are available.

 Γûá Frame

 Select this type to create a frame window.

 Γûá Dialog

 Select this type to create a dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.40.7. Frame Details: Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This group allows you to tell PM whether you want to be able to dynamically
size your application, and, if not what type of border you require.

The following border styles are available.

 Γûá No Border

 Selecting this radio button results in the creation of a window with no
 border.

 Γûá Line Border

 Selecting this radio button results in the creation of a window with a
 single-width line border. This border is not sizeable.

 Γûá Dialog Border

 Selecting this radio button results in the window having a double-width
 non-sizeable line border, as used in dialog boxes.

 Γûá Sizeable Border

 Selecting this radio button results n the creation of a window with a sizeable
 border. This allows the user to change the size of the application window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41. Frame Window Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Frame Window Options

The Frame Window Options Dialog Box allows you to change some of the more
specialized aspects of your frame window. It contains a number of groups of
controls which you can select to choose the frame window options you require
for your window.

The Initial Settings group controls the initial appearance of the window.

    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá System Modal
    Γûá Tasklist

 The Window Flags group of controls allow you to specify the Frame Window
 styles that control the behaviour of the window, and include:

 Γûá Clip Children
 Γûá Clip Siblings
 Γûá Clip Parent
 Γûá Save Bits
 Γûá Sync Paint
 Γûá No Byte Align
 Γûá No Move With Owner

 The Position Relative to... group is used to indicate the position on the
 screen that your window should be created.

 The Load Options group is used to indicate when the window should be loaded
 into memory.

 The Memory Options group controls how memory required by the window is
 managed.

 The Source File field is used to enter the location of the source code
 generated for this window.

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.1. Frame Options: System Modal Setting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you would like your window to be system modal.

This means that the window will receive all keyboard and mouse input,
effectively disabling all other windows. The user must respond to this window
before being able to continue work in other windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.2. Frame Options: Tasklist Setting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you check this box, your program title is added to the front of the frame
window text and the resulting string is used as the window title.

This string is also entered into the task list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.3. Frame Options: Position Relative to... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Position Relative to group is used to indicate the position on the screen
that your window should be created. The following choices are available.

 Γûá Shell Position

 The PM shell determines the size and position of your window.

 Γûá Window

 Align the window relative to its parent.

 Γûá Screen

 Align the window relative to the screen.

 Γûá Mouse

 Align the window relative to the position of the mouse pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.4. Frame Options: Source File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Source File field is used to enter the location of the source code
generated for this window.

If the field is left empty, the window's source code is written into the
default file used for the application; otherwise, the source is written to
files with the name supplied, and appropriate extensions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.5. Frame Options: Clip Children Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish to exclude the area occupied by this window's
children when drawing in this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.6. Frame Options: Clip Siblings Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish to exclude the area occupied by this window's
siblings when drawing in this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.7. Frame Options: Clip Parent Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish this window to be clipped by its parent.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.8. Frame Options: Save Bits Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you would like the area underneath your window to be saved
when the window is made visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.9. Frame Options: Sync Paint Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish this window to be synchronously repainted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.10. Frame Options: No Byte Align Flag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish the window not to be moved in an optimized manner.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.11. Frame Options: No Move With Owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you do not wish this window to be moved when its owner is
moved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.12. Frame Options: Load Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Load Options Group is used to indicate when the window should be loaded
into memory.

If Pre-load is selected, the window will be loaded into memory when the
application is started; if Load on call is selected, the window will be loaded
into memory when it is required by the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.41.13. Frame Options: Memory Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Memory Options Group controls how memory required by the window is managed.

If Fixed is selected, the window's memory is fixed; if Moveable is selected,
the memory can be moved about by PM. If the Discardable box is checked, the
memory will be made discardable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42. List Box Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

List Box Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a list box control.
An entry field is used specify the Name and the Help Panel combo box specifies
the name of the help panel to be associated with the list.

The Style group specifies the required appearance and behavour of the list box.

    Γûá Multiple Selection
    Γûá Extended Selection
    Γûá Owner Draw
    Γûá Don't Adjust Position
    Γûá Horz Scroll Bar
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Tabstop
    Γûá Start of Group

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         brings up the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your button.

         erases the current button control and returns to the Guidelines edit
         screen. It has the same effect as selecting a control or window and
         pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42.1. List Box Details: Multiple Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish the user to be able to simultaneously select
more than one item from this list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42.2. List Box Details: Extended Selection Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Use extended selection mechanisms.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42.3. List Box Details: Owner Draw Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish to provide the code which displays the list
items in the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42.4. List Box Details: Don't Adjust Position Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you select this option, the height of the list box will not be adjusted to a
multiple of the item height. This may cause parts of an item not to be
displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.42.5. List Box Details: Horz Scroll Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you wish the list box to be drawn with a horizontal
scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.43. Menu Arrangement ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Arrangement

This dialog is the primary means of modifying your application's menu.

It provides a display of the current menu structure of your application as a
hierarchical list and provides you with the following options to modify that
structure.

              displays the Menu Details dialog box for entry of details for a
              new menu option.

              The new menu option is added as a child of the currently selected
              option (one level below).

              displays the Menu Details dialog box with details of the
              currently selected menu option.

              deletes the currently selected item.

              removes the currently selected item and inserts it ahead of its
              preceding sibling. Thus the order of displayed menu items is
              altered. Movement is always within a level, and the button is
              disabled if the current item is the first at that level.

              removes the currently selected item and inserts it after the
              following sibling. Thus the order of displayed menu items is
              altered. Movement is always within a level, and the button is
              disabled if the current item is the last at that level.

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.43.1. Menu Arrangement: List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is a hierarchical list of all the menu items within the menu bar.

Clicking on a node will toggle between a collapsed and expanded view of the
next level of that branch.

Each item is shown in the list with its name followed by its textual
representation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44. Menu Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Details

This dialog is used to enter or change the details of a menu item on a menu bar

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the item.

Three groups of radio buttons allow the Content of the item, its Organisation
and the Message Type it generates to be specified.

The Styles group specifies the state in which the item will initially appear,
and contains the following options:

    Γûá Checked
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Highlighted
    Γûá Framed
    Γûá No Dismiss
    Γûá Static Item
    Γûá Cascade Menu

    In the Accelerator group, an accelerator key combination to associate with
    the menu option can be selected from the drop down list, and one or more
    modifiers added, if required, using the check boxes.

    The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

                 causes the Resource Selection dialog box to appear, allowing
                 the selection of an image to be placed in the menu.

                 This push button is only available if the content of the menu
                 option has been defined as Bitmap.

            brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
            Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used
            within the window.

            invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the
            actions which provide the functionality behind your control.

            erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the
            same effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL]
            key.

                 accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

                 discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

                 displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.1. Menu Item Details: Content ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the following options to specify the content of this menu item.

    Γûá Text

    If you select this option, the text specified in the Text field (above)
    will be displayed in the menu.

    Γûá Separator

    Selecting this option causes a separator bar to placed at this position in
    the pulldown menu. This option is not available if you have selected
    Sub-Menu for the type of your menu option.

    Γûá Bitmap

    Selecting this option tells the system that the menu item to be displayed
    is a bitmap. It is up to your application to display the bitmap when it
    receives the appropriate message from PM.

    Γûá Owner Draw

    Select this option if your application will be drawing the menu options
    itself. This allows you to combine bitmaps and text in a menu option or to
    choose your own method of displaying the menu option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.2. Menu Item Details: Checked Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option to produce a menu item which is initially checked. This
option is not available for action bar items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.3. Menu Item Details: Disabled Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you want the menu item to be initially disabled. When
disabled, the item is drawn half-tone and cannot be selected by the user.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.4. Menu Item Details: Highlighted Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this option if you want the menu item to be initially highighted. The
menu item is highlighted by inverting the colours of the item name and its
background. The application rarely sets this attribute directly, relying
instead on the default processing of user input to set the highlighted state of
an item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.5. Menu Item Details: Framed Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select this optoin if you want a frame to be placed around the menu item. With
this attribute set, an item in a menu bar is framed by vertical lines to its
left and right; an item in a drop-down menu is framed by horizontal lines above
and below it. Framed menu entries must be attached to the window's action-bar,
otherwise the option is not available.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.6. Menu Item Details: No Dismiss Attribute ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this option causes a submenu or menu item to remain displayed after
the user chooses an item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.7. Menu Details: Static Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option causes the item to be non selectable.

The item is therefore used for informational purposes only.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.8. Menu Details: Cascade Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Conditional cascade menus act like normal cascade menus, except that the
cascade does not automatically open when the user selects it.

To open the conditional cascade menu, the mini-push button on the menu item
must be selected. If the menu is selected without opening the cascade, the
default item in the cascade is selected. The default action is identified by a
check mark.

This option is only available for Sub-Menu items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.9. Menu Details: Accelerator Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select a key name from the dropdown list box to specify the accelerator key to
be used for invoking this menu item. This key should be used in conjunction
with one or more of the Accelerator Key Modifiers


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.10. Menu Details: Accelerator Key Modifiers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following options are used in conjunction with the Accelerator Key to
specify the key combination used to select the menu item.

    Γûá Shift

    Check this control if you want the user to press either of the [Shift] keys
    in conjunction with the key name specified in the Key field.

    Γûá Control

    Check this control if you want the user to press either of the [Ctrl] keys
    in conjunction with the key name specified in the Key field.

    Γûá Alt

    Check this control if you want the user to press either of the [Alt] keys
    in conjunction with the key name specified in the Key field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.11. Menu Details: Organisation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu item organization determines how a menu item is displayed and what kind of
data a menu contains. Menu organization is set when a menu item is created and
are not typically changed at run time. All menu organization options are
mutually exclusive. Select one of the following options to define the
organisation of this menu item.

    Γûá None

    No special organisation is to apply to the menu item.

    Γûá Break

    The menu item is the last one in a row or column. The next item is to be
    displayed at the beginning of a new row or column.

    Γûá Break Separator

    This is the same as a break, except that it draws a separator between rows
    or columns of a pulldown. This setting may only be used with submenus.

    Γûá Button Separator

    The item is a button. Any menu may have zero, one, or two items of this
    type. These are the last items in a menu and are automatically displayed
    after a separator bar. The user cannot move the cursor to these items, but
    can select them with the mouse or with the appropriate key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.44.12. Menu Details: Message Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the following values to indicate the message type generated by
this menu item.

    Γûá Command

    A command notification message is sent to the owner window when it has a
    command to report or when a keystroke has been translated by an accelerator
    table into a notification message.

    Γûá System Command

    An application that has a window with a System menu can change the size and
    position of that window by sending system commands. The system commands are
    usually generated by the user selecting commands from the system menu. This
    setting allows an application to emulate the user action by sending a
    System command message to the window

    Γûá Help Request

    A help message is identical to a normal notification message but a help
    message implies that the application should respond by displaying help
    information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.45. Menu Bar Details Dialog Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Bar Details

This dialog is used to enter or change the details of the actual menu bar

An entry field specifies the Name and the Vertical Flip Option probably does
something impressive.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

            brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
            Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used
            within the window.

            invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the
            actions which provide the functionality behind your control.

            erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the
            same effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL]
            key.

                 accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

                 discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

                 displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.45.1. Menu Bar Details: Flip Option ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pull down menus are usually displayed below their associated menu bar item,
unless they won't fit, in which case they are displayed above it.

This style reverses that behaviour, thus pull downs are normally displayed
above the item unless there is insufficient room, in which case they are
displayed below.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46. Multiple Line Entry Field Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multiple Line Entry Field Details

This dialog allows you to fully describe the multiple line entry (MLE) field
control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies a Help Panel to be associated with the field.

Additionally, a number of Style Flags can be set, which refine the behaviour of
the MLE control:

    Γûá Scrollbar
    Γûá Border
    Γûá Word Wrap
    Γûá Read Only
    Γûá Ignore Tab Key
    Γûá Disable Undo
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Start of Group

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         brings up the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your button.

         erases the current button control and returns to the Guidelines edit
         screen. It has the same effect as selecting a control or window and
         pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.1. MLE Details: Scrollbar Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Horizontal and Vertical styles cause the MLE to display and handle the
respective type of scrollbar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.2. MLE Details: Border Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want this MLE to be displayed with a thin border
around it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.3. MLE Details: Word Wrap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want this MLE to wrap words once the text reaches the
right-hand side of the control. Lines are automatically broken which are longer
than the width of the MLE field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.4. MLE Details: Read Only Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want text to be read-only in the MLE; that is, the
user is not able to change the contents of the field.

This style can be useful when displaying lengthy static text in a client or
dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.5. MLE Details: Ignore Tab Key Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Causes the MLE to ignore the [Tab] key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.46.6. MLE Details: Disable Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Causes the MLE not to respond to undo actions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.47. Scroll Bar Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Scroll Bar Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a scroll bar control.
An entry field is used specify the Name and the Help Panel combo box specifies
the name of the help panel to be associated with the scroll bar.

The Type group specifies the particular variant of scroll bar to use, whether
Horizontal or Vertical

The Style group specifies the required appearance and behavour of the scroll
bar.

    Γûá Set Thumb Size
    Γûá Auto Track
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Tabstop
    Γûá Start of Group

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         brings up the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your button.

         erases the current button control and returns to the Guidelines edit
         screen. It has the same effect as selecting a control or window and
         pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.47.1. Scroll Bar Details: Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This group specifies the particular variant of scroll bar to use, whether
Horizontal scroll bar or Vertical scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.47.2. Scroll Bar Details: Set Thumb Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this style if you want the size of the thumb on the scroll bar to be set
automatically.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.47.3. Scroll Bar Details: Auto Track ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want the scroll bar to automatically track a given
list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48. Static Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static Details

This dialog allows you to enter and change the details of a static field
control.

Two entry fields specify the Name and Text, and the Help Panel combo box
specifies the name of the help panel to be associated with the field.

One of a variety of Static Types can be chosen and the following styles may
also be specified:

    Γûá Word Wrap
    Γûá Half-Tone
    Γûá Mnemonic
    Γûá Auto Size
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Disabled
    Γûá Tabstop
    Γûá Start of Group

 If the Type of the control has been defined as Text, the Alignment group of
 controls may be used to adjust its placement.

 The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              causes the Resource Selection dialog box to appear, allowing the
              selection of a bitmap to be placed in the menu.

              This push button is only available if the Type of the control has
              been defined as Bitmap.

              causes the Resource Selection dialog box to appear, allowing the
              selection of an icon to be placed in the menu.

              This push button is only available if the Type of the control has
              been defined as Icon or System Icon.

         brings up the Presentation Parameters dialog. Here you specify the
         Presentation Parameters, such as colours and fonts, to be used within
         the window.

         invokes the Action Editor This is used to write code for the actions
         which provide the functionality behind your control.

         erases the current control and dismisses the dialog. It has the same
         effect as selecting a control or window and pressing the [DEL] key.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.1. Static Details: Type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the options in this group to define the type of the static field.

 Γûá Text

 Select this option if you want this field to be a static text field.

 Γûá Group Box

 Select this option if you want the field to be a group box.

 Γûá Foreground Frame

 Select this option if you require a box with a foreground colour frame.

 Γûá Background Frame

 Select this option if you require a box with a background colour frame.

 Γûá Halftone Frame

 Select this option if you require a box with a halftone frame.

 Γûá Icon

 Select this option if you require an icon.

 Γûá System Icon

 Select this option if you require one of the standard system icons.

 Γûá Bitmap

 Select this option to display a bitmap in the static field.

 Γûá Foreground Rectangle

 Select this option if you require a foreground colour-filled rectangle.

 Γûá Background Rectangle

 Select this option if you require a background colour-filled rectangle.

 Γûá Halftone Rectangle

 Select this option if you require a halftone rectangle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.2. Static Details: Alignment ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select one of the following options to define how you want the text of the
static field to be aligned horizontally.

 Γûá Left

 Select this option to left align the text.

 Γûá Centered

 Select this option to center the text in the field.

 Γûá Right

 Select this option to right align the text in the field.

 Select one of the following options to define how you want the text of the
 static field to be positioned vertically.

 Γûá Top

 Select this option to position the text at the top of the field.

 Γûá Middle

 Select this option to position the text in the middle of field.

 Γûá Bottom

 Select this option to position the text at the bottom of the field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.3. Static Details: Word Wrap Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this style if you want text in the field to be wrapped at word
boundaries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.4. Static Details: Half-Tone Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want the field to have a half- tone (greyed)
appearance.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.5. Static Details: Mnemonic Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want the mnemonic specified in the field's text to
move the cursor to the next editable field in sequence from this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8.48.6. Static Details: Auto Size Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this option if you want the contents to be sized to fit the control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Action Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                        Γûá The Guidelines Action Editor Γûá

Guidelines supplies the Action Editor to allow you to create and edit action
modules.

It is a full-featured editor designed to ease the burden of writing source
code. It provides powerful cut and paste features, as well as a Code Prompter
which assists you in writing JOT source code.

For instructions on using the Guidelines Action Editor, see the section
entitled Using The Action Editor

For a description of the editor itself, its menu items, dialogs and other
component parts, see the Client Window section.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Using The Action Editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using The Action Editor

This section contains similar information to the reference help panels, but it
is presented in a more task oriented fashion.

The following activities are described:

    Γûá Creating Action Modules
    Γûá Opening Existing Action Modules
    Γûá Deleting Action Modules
    Γûá Saving Action Modules
    Γûá Printing Action Modules
    Γûá Checking Syntax
    Γûá Arranging Windows
    Γûá The Code Prompter
    Γûá Using the Clipboard
    Γûá Finding and Replacing Text
    Γûá Exporting Code Modules
    Γûá Importing Code Modules
    Γûá Changing the Action Editor Display


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.1. Creating Action Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating Action Modules

There are two types of modules within Guidelines - Code Modules, and Thread
Modules.

A Thread Module differs from a normal Code Module in that it is used
specifically to create a new thread of execution within the current process.

New action modules are created by selecting the New submenu option from the
module menu or by selecting the required Object/Child/Event combination from
the event selection bar.

The Action Editor displays a new subwindow containing the outline of an action
module


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.2. Opening Existing Action Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Opening Action Modules

Existing action modules are opened by selecting the Open option from the module
menu or by selecting the required Object/Child/Event combination from the event
selection bar.

If the menu option is chosen, the Open Module Dialog box is displayed, allowing
you to select one or more action modules to open. Guidelines will only display
those modules for which code has been defined.  When a number of action
module(s) are opened, they appear in individual subwindows cascaded across the
Action Editor Client Window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.3. Deleting Action Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deleting Action Modules

Action modules are deleted by selecting Delete from the module menu When this
option is selected, the Delete Module dialog box is displayed, giving you the
opportunity to choose one or more modules to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.4. Saving Action Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Saving Action Modules

When action modules are modified, they may be saved by selecting Save or Save
all from the module menu or by using the Close all menu options.

In the Close all case, you are prompted to save any changed modules before they
are closed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.5. Printing Action Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Printing Action Modules

Action modules may be printed by selecting Print from the module menu.

When you select this option, the Print Dialog Box is displayed, giving you the
opportunity to print the current code module, all code modules, or just the
currently selected text (if any).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.6. Checking Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checking Syntax

The syntax of the currently selected code module may be checked by selecting
Check Syntax from the module menu. or by pressing [F2].

Syntax is automatically checked when code module windows are closed and you are
warned if there are any errors in the code. Another way of checking code syntax
is by using the Code Prompter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7. Arranging Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Creating Action Modules

The Action Editor provides a number of ways of managing and arranging the
action module windows.

Every window in the action editor may be sized, maximized, minimized and moved
independently of the others. When windows are minimized, they appear as icons
at the bottom of the action editor window.

The following actions are discussed in separate sections:

    Γûá Selecting Open Windows
    Γûá Cascading Windows
    Γûá Tiling Windows
    Γûá Minimising Windows
    Γûá Arranging Icons


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7.1. Selecting Open Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting Open Windows

To select a code module window which is currently open, you may:

 Γûá select the window using the mouse

 Γûá restore the window from an icon using its system menu or by double-clicking
 it with the left mouse button, or

 Γûá select the code module name from the Window menu.

 If there are a large number of windows open, the last option in the Window
 menu will say More...

 Selecting this option will display a list box containing the full list of open
 modules. Select the required module from this list


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7.2. Cascading Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cascading Windows

Code windows may be arranged on the action editor window by selecting Cascade
all from the Window menu or by pressing [Shift + F5]

This option cascades the non-minimized code windows from top-left within the
action editor window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7.3. Tiling Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tiling Windows

Code windows may be tiled over the action editor window by selecting Tile all
from the Window menu or by pressing [Shift + F4]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7.4. Minimising Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Minimising Windows

Code windows may be minimized to icons by selecting Minimize from their system
menus, or by using the Minimize all option on the Window menu to minimize all
code windows to icons.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.7.5. Arranging Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Arranging Icons

The icons drawn at the bottom of the action editor window may be arranged to
make them more compact, using the Arrange Icons option from the Window menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.8. The Code Prompter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Code Prompter

The Code Prompter is invoked by pressing the right mouse button at the point in
the code where you wish to prompted.

When the right mouse button is pressed, the prompter checks the syntax of your
code and displays a popup menu of all the options available to you at that
point. You may then choose an option and the prompter will insert the
appropriate text into your code.

The prompter may display several levels, arranged into functional groups of
popup menus in order to guide you to the code you are looking for.  It will
insert template or prototype code, according to the item selected.  It may be
used in this way to provide an instant guide to the JOT language, without
needing to request help or read the Language Reference Manual.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.9. Using the Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Using the Clipboard

Source code in action module windows may be selected using the mouse and then
cut or copied into the clipboard using the standard PM keystrokes or by using
the options on the Edit menu

Source code copied while in the action editor may be pasted into other
applications using the clipboard facilities provided by Presentation Manager.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.10. Finding and Replacing Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Finding and Replacing Text

If you want to locate or change text in one or more code modules, use the Find
option on the Edit Menu menu to display the Find/Replace dialog box.

In this dialog box, use the following fields to set up your search:

 Find text:        Enter the text you wish to find

 Replace with:     If you wish to replace the text if found, enter the
                   replacement text in this field

 Options:          Select from the following options to change the was the
                   search is carried out:

    Current Module:
                      Select this option to search only the currently selected
                      module

    All Modules:
                      Select this option to search all modules.

    Case Sensitive:
                      Check this box for the search to be case sensitive. In
                      this case, only exact matches of uppercase and lowercase
                      letters will be found

    Verify Changes:
                      Check this box if you wish to be prompted by Guidelines
                      before any replacements are made

 When you have entered the required information, select the Find push button to
 locate the text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.11. Exporting Code Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Exporting Code Modules

The action editor gives you the facility to export source code to text files.

In order to use this facility, you must first select the code to export, and
then select the Export Code option from the module menu .

You are prompted to enter the name of the file to export to and, when you press
, the code is saved. This code may be modified using an external editor and
then imported back into Guidelines when required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.12. Importing Code Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Importing Code Modules

Source code may be imported from text files by first selecting the code module
into which the code is to be imported and then selecting the Import Code option
on the module menu .

The imported code is inserted at the current cursor location and may be edited
to suit the application, e.g. to change module and variable names, etc.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1.13. Changing the Editor Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Changing the Editor Display

The Action Editor has a number of options which you may use to change its
appearance to suit your tastes.

These options are available from the Options item on the Edit menu .

When this item is selected, the Action Options Dialog is displayed.

This dialog box allows you to select the Foreground and Background colors of
the code windows and to choose the font used to display the code module text.
These options are saved between sessions.

In addition to setting the text font and color, you may check the Save Position
option on the The Edit Menu menu to save the current position of the action
editor each time you close it. The next time the editor is loaded, it will be
displayed in this same saved position.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. The Action Editor Client Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Client Window

The Action Editor Client Window is displayed when you select any of the
Guidelines options for editing action modules. This window contains subwindows
in which you will enter the code for each action module you create.

It consists of the following parts:

    Γûá The Menu Bar

    The Menu Bar provides the mechanism for accessing the features of the
    Action Editor

    Γûá Event Selection Bar.

    The Event Selection Bar provides a quick way to open the action module for
    an event or to create a new action module for an event.

    Γûá Work Area.

    The Work Area of the Action Editor provides a uniform background upon which
    action module windows and their iconized representations are displayed.

    Γûá Action Module Windows.

    Action module windows are arranged over the top of the work area and are
    used to enter code for action modules.

 Additionally, there are a number of dialogs displayed by the editor at various
 times, and these are detailed in the Action Editor Dialog Box Reference


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2.1. The Action Module Windows ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Action Module Windows are arranged over the top of the work area.The status
line is situated at the bottom of the Action Editor Client Window. It displays
brief help information for each menu option as it is selected as well as status
information on startup.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Action Editor Menu Bar Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Bar

This section details the choices available from the Menu Bar of the Action
Editor.

It contains the following sections:

    Γûá The Module Menu
    Γûá The Edit Menu
    Γûá The Windows Menu
    Γûá The Help Menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1. The Module Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module Menu

The Module menu contains options for creating, opening, deleting, and saving
Guidelines action modules.

In addition, it allows you to edit global variables and structures, as well as
perform syntax checking and print the code.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá New submenu
    Γûá Open
    Γûá Delete
    Γûá Structures
    Γûá External Structures
    Γûá External Functions
    Γûá Global variables
    Γûá Save
    Γûá Save all
    Γûá Close all
    Γûá Import Code
    Γûá Export Code
    Γûá Print
    Γûá Check Syntax
    Γûá Check All Modules
    Γûá Exit (F3)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.1. Module: New Sub menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: New Sub Menu

This option is selected to add a new action module to the workspace. It
contains the following items:

    Γûá Module: New: Code Module
    Γûá Module: New: Thread


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.2. Module: New: Code Module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: New: Code Module

Opens a new window within the editor, with the name CodeModuleN where N is a
unique integer starting with 1. The function name can be changed as needed.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + N]

    Notes


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.3. Module: New: Thread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: New: Thread

Opens a new window within the editor, with the name ThreadN where N is a unique
integer starting with 1. The thread name can be changed as needed.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + T]

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.4. Module: Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Open

This option allows you to select one or more modules to open for editing.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + O]

    Notes
            When this option is selected, the Open Module Dialog Box is
            displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.5. Module: Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Delete

This option allows you to delete one or more action modules.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + D]

    Notes
            When you select this option the Delete Module Dialog Box is
            displayed, giving you the opportunity to select the module(s) you
            wish to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.6. Module: Structures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Structures

Selecting this option opens the Structures window allowing you to add, edit and
delete structures required by your code modules.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            This window behaves in the same way as normal code windows, except
            that it may only be used to enter structures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.7. Module: External Structures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: External Structures

Displays the External Structures Module, which is present by default iconized
at the bottom of the Action Editor window. Data structures which have been
defined in another file but which are referenced in this file are defined here.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.8. Module: External Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: External Functions

Displays the External Functions Module, which is present by default iconized at
the bottom of the Action Editor window. Functions which have been defined in
another file but which are referenced in this file are defined here.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.9. Module: Global variables ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Global variables

Selecting this option opens the Global Variables window allowing you to add,
edit and delete global variables required by your action modules.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            This window behaves in the same way as normal action module
            windows, except that it may only be used for variables.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.10. Module: Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Save

Saves to the application workspace any changes made to the current module since
it was opened, or last saved.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + S]

    Notes
            The action modules are not saved to disk until the Save option is
            selected from the File menu in the main Guidelines window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.11. Module: Save all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Save all

Saves to the application workspace any changes made to any of the modules since
they were opened, or last saved.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            The action modules are not saved to disk until the Save option is
            selected from the File menu in the main Guidelines window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.12. Module: Close all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Close all

Selecting this option causes all currently open action module windows to be
closed, but the Action Editor remains open.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            If any of the windows have been edited, the action editor informs
            you that the action module has been changed and asks if you wish to
            save it first.

            If you select Yes at this prompt, the action module will be saved
            to the application workspace. If you select No, the window will be
            closed without your changes being saved. If you select Cancel, the
            current window will not be closed and you wil be returned to the
            action editor, where you can continue to work.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.13. Module: Import Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Import Code

Displays a standard File Open dialog, which allows the user to select a text
file containing JOT code. This file will be read in at the cursor position in
the current module.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.14. Module: Export Code ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Export Code

Displays a standard File Save As dialog, which allows the user to specify a
file in which to save the currently highlighted text.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.15. Module: Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Print

Allows the user to print the contents of the current code module, all code
modules, or just the selected text.

    Accelerator
            [Ctrl + P]

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.16. Module: Check Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Check Syntax

Instructs Guidelines to check the syntax of the current code module. Any errors
are displayed, along with a message box describing the error.

    Accelerator
            [F2]

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.17. Module: Check All Modules ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Check All Modules

Instructs Guidelines to check the syntax of all code modules. Any errors are
displayed, along with a message box describing the error.

    Accelerator
            none.

    Notes
            none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.1.18. Module: Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Module: Exit

Selecting this option exits from the action editor and returns you to the
Guidelines edit window.

    Accelerator
            [F3]

    Notes
            If any of the action modules have been edited, you will prompted to
            save your changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2. Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit Menu

The Action Module Edit menu contains options for editing the various elements
of an action module, by providing you with a means of using the clipboard to
copy, cut and paste.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Undo
    Γûá Cut
    Γûá Copy
    Γûá Paste
    Γûá Clear
    Γûá Find
    Γûá Options...
    Γûá Save Position


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.1. Edit: Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Undo

This menu option allows you to undo the most recent editing change you have
made.

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl+U]

 Notes
         Should you realize that you have inadvertently deleted, or otherwise
         changed, the wrong source code, selecting this option will restore it
         to its state before editing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.2. Edit: Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Cut

Selecting this option copies the currently selected source code to the
clipboard and deletes it from your workspace.

 Accelerator
         [Shift+Del]

 Notes
         You can then choose another part of the module, or a different module,
         and select Edit: Paste to insert the source code into it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.3. Edit: Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Copy

Selecting this option copies the currently selected source code to the
clipboard.

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl+Ins]

 Notes
         You can then choose another part of the module, or a different module,
         and select Edit: Paste to insert the source code into it.

         This is useful for duplicating controls etc. in your application
         window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.4. Edit: Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Paste

Selecting this option, when available, pastes the clipboard contents into the
currently selected object.

 Accelerator
         [Shift+Ins]

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.5. Edit: Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Clear

This option is similar to Edit: Cut except that it does not place a copy of the
selection into the clipboard.

 Accelerator
         [Del]

 Notes
         If this option is selected, the only way to restore the selection is
         to immediately select Edit: Undo before making any more changes to
         your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.6. Edit: Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Find

Displays the Find/Replace Dialog, which allows the user to search for text, and
optionally replace the found text with other text.

 Accelerator
         [Ctrl + F]

 Notes
         The current module or all modules can be selected for the operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.7. Edit: Options... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Options...

Selecting this option displays the Action Options Dialog Box.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This allows you to change the colors and fonts used to display source
         code in the action editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.2.8. Edit: Save Position ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Edit: Save Position

Saves the current size and position of the Action Editor window, so that it
will be restored to the saved position in all future editing sessions.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3. Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window Menu

The Window Menu allows you to manage the display of code module windows
currently open within the Action Editor.

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Window: Tile all
    Γûá Window: Cascade all
    Γûá Window: Minimize all
    Γûá Window: [Window List]
    Γûá Window: Arrange icons


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3.1. Window: Tile all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window: Tile all

Selecting this option results in all open windows being tiled to fit into the
action editor window.

 Accelerator
         [Shift+F4]

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3.2. Window: Cascade all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window: Cascade all

Selecting this option results in all open windows being cascaded within the
action editor window.

 Accelerator
         [Shift+F5]

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3.3. Window: Minimize all ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window: Minimize all

Selecting this option results in all open windows being minimized to icons
within the action editor window.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3.4. Window: [Window List] ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window: [Window List]

The bottom portion of the Window Menu is a list of all code modules currently
open in the editor.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         When you select a code module name, its window becomes the top-most
         window and becomes the active window. In addition, its name is checked
         on the Window Menu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.3.5. Window: Arrange icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Window: Arrange Icons

Arranges the minimized icons such that they appear in rows, with even spacing.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4. Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Menu

It contains the following items:

    Γûá Help index
    Γûá Help contents
    Γûá General help
    Γûá Using help


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4.1. Help: Help index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Help index

Invokes the online help system, and displays the index.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4.2. Help: Help contents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Help contents

Invokes the online help system, and displays the table of contents.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4.3. Help: General Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: General Help

Invokes the online help system, and displays the top level panel.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         none.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3.4.4. Help: Using help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help: Using help

Enters the online help system, and displays information on how to use the help
system.

 Accelerator
         none.

 Notes
         This panel is the standard one supplied by OS/2 and doesn't follow the
         style of the other Guidelines panels.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Action Editor Dialog Box Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dialog Box Reference

This section contains details of all dialog boxes within the Action Editor,
and, where appropriate, subsections for their entry fields.

It contains the following sections:

    Γûá Action Options Dialog
    Γûá Delete Module Dialog
    Γûá Export Code Dialog
    Γûá Find/Replace Dialog
    Γûá Open Module Dialog
    Γûá Print Dialog Box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1. Action Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Action Options

This dialog allows you to select the appearance of the Action Editor by
specifying colors and fonts. The Colors groupbox contains the Foreground and
Background dropdown lists for color selection.

The Font list is used for font selection.

As you change the colors and/or font of the selected attribute, the Sample
display previews the changes.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1.1. Action Options: Foreground Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dropdown field allows selection of the color of the text displayed in the
editor windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1.2. Action Options: Background Color ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dropdown field allows selection of the color of the background displayed
in the editor windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.1.3. Action Options: Font List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list box displays a list of the fonts currently available for display in
the editor windows. The highlighted value is the current selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2. Delete Module Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Delete Module

This dialog is used to select action modules for deletion. Once an action
module is deleted, any reference to it and the source code it contains is
removed from the application.

The modules to be deleted are first selected using the multiple selection
Module List.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

           selects all entries in the list.

           deselects all entries in the list.

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.2.1. Delete Module: Module List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list shows all the action modules in the current program. The ones to be
deleted are highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3. Export Code Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Export Code

This dialog is used to select the File Name to which the currently highlighted
code is saved, and the Current Directory in which the file will reside.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

              accepts any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any changes and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3.1. Export Code Dialog: Current Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the name of the current directory. The file containing the
exported code will reside in this directory.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.3.2. Export Code Dialog: File Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field specifies the name of the file in which the exported code will be
saved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4. Find/Replace Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Find/Replace Dialog Box

This dialog is used to search for specified text within code modules, and
optionally replace it. The Find text field is used to enter the text to be
found. A replacement for that text may be entered in the Replace with field.

The Options group of controls allows you to specify whether the search should
span All Modules or just the Current Module. You may also select whether the
search is to be Case Sensitive and, if replacing text, whether you wish to
Verify each change.

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

                starts the search. If successful, the text found is
                highlighted.

                if searching through multiple modules, skips the current
                module, and starts searching the next.

                replaces first occurrence of search text with replacement.

                replaces all occurrence of search text with replacement text.
                If Verify Changes is checked, you will be prompted before each
                replacement.

              displays this help panel.

              dismisses this dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4.1. Find/Replace: Find text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This field is used to enter the text string you wish to search for.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4.2. Find/Replace: Replace with ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If you wish to replace the found text, enter the replacement text in this
field. When performing a search, no entry is required in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4.3. Find/Replace: Current Module ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select the Current Module option to search only the currently selected module.

Select the All Modules option to search all modules which make up the current
program.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4.4. Find/Replace: Case Sensitive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box for the search to be case sensitive. In this case, only exact
matches of uppercase and lowercase letters will be found.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.4.5. Find/Replace: Verify Changes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check this box if you wish to be prompted by Guidelines before each/any
replacements are made.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.5. Open Module Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Open Module Dialog Box

The Open Module Dialog Box is used to select action modules for editing. The
modules to be edited are first selected using the multiple selection Module
List.

When an action module is opened, a window is created for it in the Action
Editor's primary window and it can be selected for editing. If multiple action
modules are opened, their windows are automatically cascaded in the editor's
primary window for ease of access.

This dialog also contains the following push buttons:

           selects all entries in the list.

           deselects all entries in the list.

              accepts any selections and dismisses the dialog.

              discards any selections and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.5.1. Open Module Dialog: Module List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This list shows all the action modules in the current program. The ones to be
opened are highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6. Print Code Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Print Code

This dialog allows you to specify various options when printing out JOT source
code.

The Options group radio buttons for specifying the scope of the code to be
printed - whether the whole of the current module, all modules in the program,
or just the highlighted text. Check boxes also determine whether a Title will
be printed, and whether the modules should be printed One Per Page

The Printer group contains two spin-buttons, on for specifying the number of
copies to print, the other specifying the job priority

The dialog also contains the following push buttons:

                  Displays the Printer Setup dialog, allowing the selection of
                  the printer to be used.

                  Displays the Select Printer Font dialog, allowing the
                  specification of the font in which the code will be printed.

              sends the job to the printer, and dismisses the dialog.

              cancels the job, and dismisses the dialog.

              displays this help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6.1. Print Code: Scope ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These radio buttons allow you to specify what is printed. The options are:

 Γûá Print current module

 Print just the currently displayed module.

 Γûá Print all modules

 Prints all modules from the current program.

 Γûá print selected text

 Prints just the text which is highlighted.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6.2. Print Code: Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selecting this option will cause a title to be printed on each page containing
the module name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6.3. Print Code: One Per Page ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

If this option is selected, Guidelines will print each module on a separate
page.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6.4. Print Code: No. of copies ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Set the spin button to the number of copies desired.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.6.5. Print Code: Job Priority ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This spin button allows you to set the priority of the print job (to Low,
Normal or High).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.7. Select Printer Font Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select Printer Font


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.8. Select Printer Font: Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.9. Select Printer Font: Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.10. Select Printer Font: Style ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.11. Select Printer Font: Display ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.12. Select Printer Font: Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.13. Select Printer Font: Outline ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.14. Select Printer Font: Underscore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4.15. Select Printer Font: Strikeout ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. The JOT Language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

                         ΓûáThe JOT Programming Language Γûá

This reference is divided into the following sections:

    Γûá Introduction to JOT
    Γûá JOT Language Reference
    Γûá JOT Function Reference
    Γûá JOT Predefined Constants


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Introduction to JOT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section provides an overview of JOT and details the principles behind its
design and implementation.

The sections are:

    Γûá Design Principles
    Γûá Windows, Methods and Properties
    Γûá Events and Actions
    Γûá Creating an Application


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.1. Design Principles ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT was designed to provide a language for designing and building Graphical
User Interfaces. Its main aims were that it be:

 Γûá a general language - one that is able to be translated to other languages
 easily for compilation and distribution in executable form

 Γûá a complete language - the language should not prevent programmers from
 achieving their goals

 Γûá based on the standard GUI architecture - windows send messages to each other
 and respond to message-based input


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.2. Windows, Methods and Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The starting point for any JOT application is the window.

Windows are created using the Guidelines Screen Editor and code is added to
implement actions based on window events. All windows have methods which are
used to carry out tasks specific to the window type.

Windows also have properties which allow the programmer to obtain information
about the current state of the window and to change the way the window behaves.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.3. Events and Actions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Windows carry out their tasks by reacting to events - messages passed to them
by the user interface manager.

The code modules which carry out the tasks are called Action Modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1.4. Creating an Application ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A JOT program consists of a number of code modules stored in one application
file. This application file also contains the window definitions for the
application. An executable application is created in several phases:

  1. A translator translates the JOT source into source files for the specified
     development environment.

  2. A make utility is used to carry out the compile and link steps for the
     development environment in order to produce the executable program.

 A JOT application is created by designing the application windows in the
 Guidelines Screen Editor and then adding action modules to respond to window
 events. When the application is complete, native C source code is generated
 and the application is compiled and linked to form an executable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. JOT Language Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section provides a reference for the JOT language.

The sections are:

    Γûá Elements of JOT
    Γûá Declarations and Definitions
    Γûá Functions
    Γûá Expressions and Operators
    Γûá Statements


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1. Elements of JOT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These sections are provide details for the lexical elements ofJOT:

    Γûá Character Set
    Γûá Escape Sequences
    Γûá Comments
    Γûá Identifiers
    Γûá Keywords
    Γûá Constants


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.1. Character Set ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The JOT character set consists of the letters, digits and punctuation marks
having specific meaning in the JOT language.

The JOT character set includes the following:

 Γûá The uppercase and lowercase letters of the English alphabet

  A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
  a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

 Γûá The 10 decimal digits of the Arabic number system

  0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 Γûá The following graphics characters

  " ( ) * + , - . / ; << = >> [ \ ] _

 These characters are used to form the constants, identifiers, and keywords of
 JOT. Any other punctuation characters may be used only in string literals,
 character constants and comments.

 White-space characters consisting of space, tab, line-feed, carriage-return
 and vertical-tab characters are used to separate the constants, identifiers
 and keywords in a JOT Action Module, but are otherwise ignored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.2. Escape Sequences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following characters, which include non-graphic characters and JOT
punctuation characters, may be represented using the escape sequences detailed
in the following table. If the character following a back-slash is not one of
those specified, the resulting character is the character which followed the
back-slash, as indicated below for the quotation and the back-slash characters.

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéCharacter                     ΓöéEscape       Γöé
Γöé                              ΓöéSequence     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBell (alert)                  Γöé\a           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBack-space                    Γöé\b           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéForm-feed                     Γöé\f           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéNew-line                      Γöé\n           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéCarriage return               Γöé\r           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéHorizontal tab                Γöé\t           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéVertical tab                  Γöé\v           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDouble quotation mark         Γöé\"           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBackslash                     Γöé\\           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéASCII character in octal      Γöé\ddd         Γöé
Γöénotation                      Γöé             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéASCII character in hexadecimalΓöé\xddd        Γöé
Γöénotation                      Γöé             Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.3. Comments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The character ; is used to begin a comment, which terminates at the end of the
line on which it occurs. All characters after the ; are considered to form the
comment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.4. Identifiers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An identifier is a sequence of letters and digits, including the underscore
character (_). The first character of an identifier must be a letter, but the
following characters may be any combination of letters and digits. Identifiers
are restricted to 32 characters in length and are case-insensitive.

Note: When JOT action modules are being translated to C++ code, keywords
commencing with an _ (underscore) are reserved and should not be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.5. Keywords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following identifiers are reserved as keywords:


 and         endwhile    otherwise    then

 anystruct   for         packed       to

 break       functions   real         thread

 case        globals     return       until

 char        if          scaled       void

 continue    image       short        while

 do          long        sreal        window

 else        lreal       step

 end         message     string

 endfor      mod         struct

 endif       not         structures

 endswitch   or          switch

The following C/C++ keywords are also reserved and are disallowed as names:


 asm        extern      return     void

 auto       float       short      volatile

 break      for         signed     while

 case       friend      sizeof     _Cdecl

 catch      goto        static     _Export

 char       if          struct     _Far16

 class      inline      switch     _Far32

 const      int         template   _Fastcall

 continue   long        this       _Inline

 default    new         throw      _Optlink

 delete     operator    try        _Packed

 do         private     typedef    _Pascal

 double     protected   union      _Seg16

 else       public      unsigned   _System

 enum       register    virtual


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.1.6. Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT recognizes several kinds of user defined constants (or "literals") in
addition to the Predefined Constants

Integer constants consist of a sequence of digits. If the sequence begins with
the digit 0 and is followed by digits in the range 0 to 7, it is taken to be an
octal integer. Otherwise, the sequence is taken to be a decimal integer.

The type of an integer constant is determined by its usage.

123
077 ; Octal
421345

Real constants consist of an integer part, a decimal point, a fraction part
and, optionally, an e or E, and a signed or unsigned integer exponent. The
integer and fraction parts must consist of a sequence of decimal digits and
either, but not both, may be missing. Either the decimal point or the letter e
(or E) and the exponent, but not both, may be missing.

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéConstant   ΓöéValue        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé123.45     Γöé123.45       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé1.2345e+2  Γöé123.45       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé1.23e-2    Γöé0.0123       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé1.23e+6    Γöé1,,230,,000  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé1e-5       Γöé0.00001      Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

String literals consist of a sequence of characters surrounded by double
quotes. A string literal is null terminated as in the C++ language. Escape
sequences may be used to embed special characters in the string.

"ABCDEFG"
"Abc\tEfg"
"Line 1\nLine 2"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2. Declarations and Definitions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT declarations establish the names and characteristics of data objects and
functions in an application. Definitions are declarations that allocate storage
for data objects or provide the body of a function.

JOT declarations and definitions have the form

[type-specifier] declarator [ = initializer]

where type specifier is the name of a defined type, and initializer gives the
value or sequence of values to be assigned to the variable being declared. The
declarator may be modified with brackets ([]) or parentheses (()).

All JOT variables and functions must be explicitly declared before use.

Function declarations are described in the "Functions" section.

The following sections go into greater detail:

    Γûá Local Data Declarations
    Γûá Global Data Declarations
    Γûá Declarators
    Γûá Initializers
    Γûá Types


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.1. Local Data Declarations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Variables defined within action modules are local to the module and are visible
only within the module within which they are defined.

Local variables exist only for the time in which the module they are declared
in is executing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.2. Global Data Declarations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Variables declared in the "Global Variables" module are visible throughout the
application and exist for the entire lifespan of the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.3. Declarators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

declarator[constant-expression]

A declarator specifies the name and other characteristics of an entity. JOT
allows you to declare arrays of values, and functions which return values.

A declarator may be modified with brackets [] or parentheses (). If it is
modified with brackets [], it indicates that it is an array. If it is modified
with parentheses (), it indicates that it is a function.

The following example defines a variable called Pi which is a REAL data object:

REAL Pi

The following example defines a variable Handles which is an array of 32 LONG
elements:

LONG Handles[32]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.4. Initializers ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

= initializer

It is possible to set the initial value of a variable by using an initializer
in a variable declaration. The initializer is applied to the declarator in the
variable declaration. Only simple variable declarations allow initializers to
be applied to them.

Variables which are not explicitly initialized default to 0, if numeric, or an
appropriate NULL value for non-numeric data types.

The following example defines a variable Pi and initializes it to an
appropriate value:

REAL Pi = 3.14159


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5. Types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT provides definitions for a set of basic data types, called "fundamental"
types.

The following sections go into greater detail:

    Γûá Character types
    Γûá Floating Point types
    Γûá Integer types
    Γûá VOID type
    Γûá Scaled Integer type
    Γûá WINDOW type
    Γûá ANYSTRUCT type
    Γûá IMAGE type
    Γûá MESSAGE type
    Γûá MODULE type
    Γûá THREAD type
    Γûá Arrays
    Γûá Structures

 Note:  In the following sections, the JOT data types are printed in uppercase.
 This serves to make them readily visible in the text of this document since,
 as for all JOT keywords, case is not significant in action modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.1. Character types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT provides two character types:

CHAR and STRING.

CHAR is equivalent to the standard C++ char data type, occupying 1 byte, and
can take values from -127 to 127. Arrays of type CHAR are always padded with
spaces by JOT.

STRING is a C++ class which provides support for variable-length
null-terminated strings. Strings use only the space required by the number of
characters in the string, plus the null terminator.

The following example defines a CHAR variable YesNo with the initial value of
'Y':

CHAR YesNo = "Y"

The following example, in the "External Functions" module declares the function
GetName, returning a STRING value:

STRING GetName()


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.2. Floating Point types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT provides the following floating-point data types:

SREAL, REAL, LREAL.

The SREAL data type represents a short floating-point value, equivalent to a
float in C++. SREAL variables are stored in memory as signed 32-bit numbers (4
bytes) ranging in value from 3.4E-38 to 3.4E+38.

The REAL data type represents a floating-point value, equivalent to a double in
C++. REAL variables are stored in memory as signed 64-bit numbers (8 bytes)
ranging in value from 1.7E-308 to 1.7E+308.

The LREAL data type represents a long floating-point value, equivalent to a
long double in C++. LREAL variables are stored in memory as signed 80-bit
numbers (16 bytes) ranging in value from 1.0E-4932 to 1.0E4932.

The following example defines a SREAL variable CurrBalance with the initial
value of 1000.00:

SREAL CurrBalance = 1000.00

The following example defines a REAL variable pi:

REAL pi

The following example defines a LREAL variable VeryLarge with the initial value
of 1.2345E+1000:

LREAL VeryLarge = 1.2345E+1000


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.3. Integer types ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT provides two types of integer variables:

SHORT and LONG.

The SHORT data type represents a short integer value, equivalent to a short in
C++. SHORT variables are stored in memory as signed 16-bit numbers (2 bytes)
ranging in value from -32,768 to 32,767.

The LONG data type represents a long integer value, equivalent to a long in
C++. LONG variables are stored as signed 32-bit numbers (4 bytes) ranging in
value from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647.

The following example defines a SHORT variable NumRecords

SHORT NumRecords

The following example defines a LONG variable

SHORT NumRecords


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.4. VOID type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The VOID data type is used in JOT to indicate that a module or external
function does not return a value.

The following example declares a function which takes an argument but does not
return a value:

VOID ShowStatus(SHORT CurrStatus)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.5. Scaled Integer type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The SCALED data type is a C++ class which provides support for
arbitrary-precision numbers.

The size of the storage allocated for this data type is dependent on the number
of digits in the number. The maximum value for a SCALED variable is determined
by the memory available in the system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.6. WINDOW type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The WINDOW data type is a JOT-specific data type used to refer to an
application's frame and dialog windows. A variable of type WINDOW may be used
to access the window's properties, methods and events.

Refer to the "Object Property/Method Specification" subsection of Expressions
and Operators for further information on accessing a window's properties,
methods and events.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.7. ANYSTRUCT type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The ANYSTRUCT data type is used when defining external functions and indicates
that the function will accept any structure name as a parameter.

SHORT ExtFunction (ANYSTRUCT aStruct, SHORT StructSize)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.8. IMAGE type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The IMAGE data type is used to refer to a bitmap or icon resource defined for
the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.9. MESSAGE type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MESSAGE data type is used to refer to a message box defined for the
application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.10. MODULE type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The MODULE data type is used to refer to a JOT Action Module in much the same
way as a C++ function pointer.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.11. THREAD type ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The THREAD data type contains information about a thread created by the
application. It is returned by the CreateThread function and is passed to other
thread-based functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.12. Arrays ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Arrays are ordered groups of data objects, called elements, of the same type.
Arrays may be of any data type.

An array declaration gives the array a type, a name, and a number of elements.
The type is the name of a defined type, declarator is a valid JOT declarator,
and constant-expression defines the number of elements in the array.

It is possible to declare a multidimensional array by following the array
declarator by multiple bracketed constant expressions. For example:

type declarator[constant-expression][constant-expression]

Each of the constant expressions defines the number of elements in its
corresponding dimension of the array.

The first subscript for each dimension of JOT arrays is 0. Therefore an array
with 5 dimensions will have elements numbered from 0 to 4.

Multidimensional arrays are stored in row-major order. When referencing
elements of the array, the last subscript varies the fastest.

The following example defines a one-dimensional array containing 12 elements of
type STRING:

STRING MonthNames[12]

The elements of MonthNames are stored in the order:

MonthNames[0]
MonthNames[1]
MonthNames[2]
MonthNames[3]
MonthNames[4]
MonthNames[5]
MonthNames[6]
MonthNames[7]
MonthNames[8]
MonthNames[9]
MonthNames[10]
MonthNames[11]

The following example defines a two-dimensional array containing six elements
of type SHORT:

SHORT Matrix[2][3]

The elements of Matrix are stored in the order:

Matrix[0][0]
Matrix[0][1]
Matrix[0][2]
Matrix[1][0]
Matrix[1][1]
Matrix[1][2]


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.2.5.13. Structures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A structure is an ordered group of data objects, which may be of different
types.

In JOT, structures are declared in the "Structures" or "External Structures"
modules as follows:

struct [Packed] identifier
    { type-specifier declarator }
end

JOT structures are much the same as 'C' structures, except that, once defined,
they become program types.

The structure declaration may be qualified with the 'packed' qualifier which
causes padding to be removed from between members of the structure. This may
cause some run-time degradation but may be necessary, for example, when
interfacing to other computer systems to ensure that the structure data is in
the correct .

Once a structures is declared, variables may be defined using that data type.

The following structure definition represents a data record:

struct MEMBER
    SHORT MemberNo
    CHAR  Name[40]
    SHORT Age
    CHAR  Address[40]
end

This structure is used throughout the application in which it is defined by
creating variables of type MEMBER. Once a variable is defined, the fields of
the structure are accessed using the 'dot' operator, as follows:

MEMBER  aMember

aMember.MemberNo = 241


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.3. Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Functions are independent collections of declarations and statements, most
often designed to perform a specific task.

The following sections go into greater detail:

    Γûá Function Definition
    Γûá Function Declarations
    Γûá Calling Functions and Passing Arguments


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.3.1. Function Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

type declarator ([parameter-list])
    { [statements] }
end

A function definition specifies the name, return type, parameters and body of a
function.

The type specifier is the name of a defined type. The parameter-list is a list
containing zero or more parameter declarations, separated by commas.

Parameter declarations have the following form:

type declarator,...

The body of a function follows the function declarator and contains the
statements required to be executed by the function. The end of the function
body is indicated by the "end" statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.3.2. Function Declarations ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

In JOT modules, the function declaration precedes the body of the function.
There is no need to provide any other declaration of the function since JOT
automatically makes the function declaration known throughout its environment.

Function declarations may also be used to provide access to functions defined
outside of JOT, for example, in external libraries and object files. Any
declarations of external functions must appear in the "External Functions"
module. Functions declared here must not be followed by a function body.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.3.3. Calling Functions and Passing Arguments ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

expression ([expression-list])

A function call is an expression that passes execution control and parameters
(if defined) to a function. A function is called in much the same way as it is
declared, the difference being that the parameter-list defined in a function
declaration are actual parameters (variables which exist at this point in the
run-time) in a function call.

The expression must be a function defined within the application or an external
reference declared in the "External Functions" module.

The expression-list is a list of actual parameters which are passed to the
function. These parameters must match in number and types, the parameters
defined in the functions declaration.

Parameters passed in JOT may be passed either by-value (which is the default)
or by-reference. By-value means that the called function cannot modify the
caller's copy of the passed variable. A variable passed by-reference will cause
the variables address in memory to be passed (rather than a copy of it's
contents). This means the called function will be directly updating the
caller's data. Passing by-reference is indicated by specifying an asterisk
('*') prior to the parameter's name when declaring the function being called.

The following example shows how passing by-reference allows a function to
update the original copy of a variable.

void funct1 ()
    SHORT var1 = 1
    SHORT var2 = 1

    funct2(var1, var2)
    ; At this point, var1 = 1, var2 = 2!
end

void funct2 (SHORT s1, SHORT *s2)
    s1 = 2
    s2 = 2
end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4. Expressions and Operators ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The following sections go into greater detail about the expressions and
operators available in JOT:

    Γûá Grouping and Evaluating Expressions
    Γûá Lvalue
    Γûá Constant Expression
    Γûá Primary Expression
    Γûá Unary Expression
    Γûá Binary Expression
    Γûá Assignment Expression
    Γûá Conversions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.1. Grouping and Evaluating Expressions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The precedence and order of evaluation affects the grouping of operands and
expressions in their evaluation. Precedence is only relevant if there are other
operators present in an expression. Expressions with higher precedence are
evaluated first.

The following table lists the operator precedence and associativity in JOT.
Operators on the same line of the list represent the same level of precedence.
Higher precedence is identified by a position higher in the list.

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéOperator Group  ΓöéAssociativity  ΓöéOperators      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPrimary         Γöéleft to right  Γöé() [] .        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéUnary           Γöéright to left  Γöé- + not        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMultiplicative  Γöéleft to right  Γöé* / mod        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAdditive        Γöéleft to right  Γöé+ -            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRelational      Γöéleft to right  Γöé<< >> <<= >>=  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéEquality        Γöéleft to right  Γöé= <<>>         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéLogical AND     Γöéleft to right  Γöéand            Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéLogical OR      Γöéleft to right  Γöéor             Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAssignment      Γöéright to left  Γöé=              Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

Grouping of operands can be forced by grouping the expressions in parentheses.

The following examples show how JOT groups operands and operators. These
expressions would be evaluated in the same way if they did not have
parentheses:

(30 + (20 / 10)) ; Evaluates to 32
((30 + 20) + 10) ; 60
((30 * 20) / 10) ; 60

The following examples show how parentheses may be used to change the grouping
of operands and operators and hence the evaluation of expressions:

30 + 20 / 10 ; Evaluates to 32
(30 + 20) / 10 ; Evaluates to 5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.2. Lvalue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Expressions which refer to modifiable memory locations are called "lvalue
expressions". The left operand in an assignment expression must be an lvalue.

Any of the following expressions evaluates to an lvalue:

 Γûá Any variable of the standard data types

 Γûá Any subscript expression ([]) which does not evaluate to an array

 Γûá A member-selection expression of any of the types mentioned in the first
 condition


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.3. Constant Expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A constant expression is an expression whose value does not change during
program execution. JOT distinguishes between constants of the following type:
integer, character, real and string literals.

Constant expressions are required in JOT in the following places:

 Γûá In the subscript declarator for an array

 Γûá In the initializer for a global variable


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.4. Primary Expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A primary expression may be one of the following:

 Γûá An identifier

 Γûá A string literal

 Γûá A parenthesized expression

 Γûá A constant expression

 Γûá A function call

 Γûá An array element specification

 Γûá A structure member specification

 Γûá An object property specification

 Γûá An object method call

 Parentheses are used to explicitly force the order of expression evaluation,
 in order to guarantee the results of expression evaluation. For example:

  30 + 20 / 10 ; Evaluates to 32
  (30 + 20) / 10 ; Evaluates to 5

 A function call contains an expression followed by an optional
 expression-list:

  expression([expression-list])

 Expression is the address of a function, which is identified by it's name. The
 expression-list contains values (separated by commas) which are passed to the
 function. There may be an empty expression-list in a function call.

 The value and type of a function call expression are equivalent to that of the
 function's return value. If the return type is void, then no value is returned
 by a call to that function.

 The subscript expression is used to reference an element within an array
 variable as follows:

  expression1[expression2]

 The value of expression2 refers to the position number in the array described
 by expression1 that is being accessed. Expression2 must be of integral type.

 For a unidimensional array, the single reference integral value represents the
 position in the array which is being accessed.

 In JOT, arrays are indexed from 0, so a subscript expression such as

  anArray[0]

 refers to the first element of an array. Similarly, the following subscript
 expression

  anArray[4]

 refers to the element at position 4 in the array, or the fifth element.

 For a multidimensional array, the leftmost subscript expression is evaluated
 first, then following subscript expressions through to the rightmost subscript
 expression.

 The following example shows how to reference the third element in a
 two-dimensional array.

  anArray[0][2]

 Structure member specification expressions consist of a primary expression
 separated from an identifiers by a dot (.):

  expression.identifier

 The result of the expression is the value associated with the named structure
 member.

 Property specification expressions are similar to structure member
 specifications, but refer to the properties available to object types within
 JOT:

  expression.identifier

 The expression refers to an object type which is being acted upon, while the
 identifier refers to a valid property for that type.  The result of the
 expression is the value associated with the object property.

 An object method call contains an expression separated from an identifier by a
 dot (.) and followed by an optional expression-list:

  expression.identifier([expression-list])

 The expression refers to an object type, while the identifier refers to a
 valid method for that type. The expression-list contains values (separated by
 commas) which are passed to the method. The expression-list may be empty.

 The result of the expression is the return value from the object method.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.5. Unary Expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unary expressions contain one operand and a unary operator.

unary-operator operand

Unary operators are placed before their operand and associate from right to
left.

The unary plus (+) operator operates on any arithmetic data type and simply
maintains the value of the operand.

The unary minus (-) operator operates on any arithmetic data type and negates
the value of the operand.

The logical negation ('not') operator determines whether the operand evaluates
to True (non-zero or non-null) or False (0 or Null). The operator operates on
all JOT data types and evaluates to True (1) if the operand is zero or Null,
and False otherwise.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.6. Binary Expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Binary expressions conain two operands separated by an operator.

operand binaryoperator operand

Binary operators associate from left to right.

The multiplication operator (*) evaluates to the product of its operands, which
must have an arithmetic type.

The division operator (/) evaluates to the quotient of its operands, which must
have an arithmetic type.

The remainder of the division is ignored if both operands are of type SHORT or
LONG.

The modulus operator ('mod') evaluates to the remainder from the division of
the left operand by the right operand. Both operands must be of type SHORT or
LONG.

The addition operator (+) evaluates to the sum of its operands, which may have
an arithmetic type or a STRING type.

The subtraction operator (-) evaluates to the difference of its operands, which
must have an arithmetic type.

The relational operators compare their first operand with their second operand
to test the validity of the relationship. The result of a relational operation
is non-zero (true) if the relationship is true, and zero (false) if the
relationship is false.

The following is a list of relational operators and the relationships they test
for:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéOperator  ΓöéTested Relationship                         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé<<        ΓöéLeft operand is less than right operand     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé>>        ΓöéLeft operand is greater than right operand  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé<<=       ΓöéLeft operand is less than or equal to right Γöé
Γöé          Γöéoperand                                     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé>>=       ΓöéLeft operand is greater than or equal to    Γöé
Γöé          Γöéright operand                               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé=         ΓöéLeft operand is equal to right operand (whenΓöé
Γöé          Γöéused in conditions)                         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
Γöé<<>>      ΓöéLeft operand is not equal to right operand  Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ

The logical operators perform logical and (and) and logical or (or) operations.
The operands must be of integral or REAL type.

Logical operator expressions are evaluated from left to right. This means if
the value of the first operand is sufficient to satisfy the operator, the
second operand is not used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.7. Assignment Expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

An assignment operation sets the result of the right hand side expression to
the left hand operand. The left hand operand must be a modifiable lvalue.

JOT supports the simple assignment operator (=) but not the C++ compound
assignment operators (+= -= *= /=, etc).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.4.8. Conversions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type conversions take place for the following reasons in JOT:

 Γûá When an assignment is made from a variable of one type to a variable of
 another type

 Γûá When an operator converts its operands before performing its operation

 Γûá When a value passed as an argument to a function has a different type from
 the function's prototype.

 JOT performs conversions on operands in the following order:

  1. If one operand has SCALED type, the other operand is converted to SCALED.

  2. If one operand has LREAL type, the other operand is converted to LREAL.

  3. If one operand has REAL type, the other operand is converted to REAL.

  4. If one operand has SREAL type, the other operand is converted to SREAL.

  5. If one operand has LONG type, the other operand is converted to LONG.

  6. Both operands have type SHORT, and the result is type SHORT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5. Statements ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section details the statements available in the JOT language.

The following sections go into greater detail:

    Γûá break
    Γûá C:
    Γûá continue
    Γûá do/until
    Γûá end
    Γûá endfor
    Γûá endif
    Γûá endswitch
    Γûá endwhile
    Γûá expression
    Γûá for
    Γûá if
    Γûá return
    Γûá switch
    Γûá while


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.1. break ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

break

The break statement is used to prematurely end any type of loop statement.

 Syntax

                                  break

 Remarks         When encountered, the break statement causes the current loop
                 to be unconditionally ended. Control continues at the
                 statement immediately after the end of loop statement.

 See Also        continue, for, while, do/until

 Example

                                  short i

                                  for i = 1 to 10
                                      if  i = 5
                                          break   ;Never gets past 5
                                      end
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.2. C: ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

C:

The C: Statement is used to embed C++ source code lines in the generated source
output file.

 Syntax

                                  C: <C-Source-Code>

 Remarks         Any line of source prefixed with C: represents C++ source code
                 which will be generated directly as entered into the resulting
                 output file. Any valid C++ code may be specified. No attempt
                 to validate the C++ code is made so it is the user's
                 responsibility if the compile fails.

                 The entered C++ code should not include variable declarations
                 (even if it  is the first statement within the module) as
                 Guidelines may have already generated C statements
                 (intermixing C++ statements and C++ variable declarations
                 without creating a new block usually generates compiler
                 errors).

 See Also

 Example

                                  C: /* This is a C++ comment */


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.3. continue ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

continue

The continue statement causes the current loop to re-loop without executing any
remaining statements contained within it.

 Syntax

                                  continue

 Remarks         The continue statement unconditionally causes control to skip
                 to re-evaluation of the loop condition without executing
                 statements which follow it in the application code.

 See Also        break, for, while, do/until

 Example

                                  for i = 1 to 25
                                      if i = 10 continue
                                      ; statements occurring here will not be
                                      ; executed if i = 10
                                  endfor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.4. do/until ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

do/until

The do/until statement is a looping construct which executes one or more times
until a condition becomes true.

 Syntax

                                  do
                                      <statements>
                                  until <condition>

 Remarks         The do..until construct will always execute <statements> at
                 least once, as the <condition> is tested at the end of the
                 loop (rather than the start as is the case in the 'while'
                 statement).

 See Also        break, continue, for, if, switch, while.

 Example         The example uses the do statement to iterate a loop, calling
                 aFunction with the looping variable x, then decrementing x
                 until x=0.

                                  do
                                      result = aFunction(x)
                                      x = x - 1
                                  until x = 0


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.5. end ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

end

The end statement is used to close a block of code or a structure definition.

 Syntax

                                  end

 Remarks         The end statement signals the end of a block of code commenced
                 using for, if, switch or while statements or a module name, or
                 the end of a structure definition commenced using the struct
                 statement.

                 End may be used in place of endfor, endif, endswitch, and
                 endwhile.

 See Also        endfor, endif, endswitch, endwhile, for, if, struct, switch,
                 while.

 Example

                                  short i

                                  for i = 1 to 10
                                      if  i = 5
                                          Sound(600, 75)
                                      end
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.6. endfor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

endfor

The endfor statement is used to end a for loop.

 Syntax

                                  endfor

 Remarks         end may be used in place of endfor.

 See Also        endfor, endif, endswitch, endwhile, for.

 Example

                                  short i

                                  for i = 1 to 10
                                      ; Do something
                                  endfor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.7. endif ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

endif

The endif statement is used to end processing of an if statement.

 Syntax

                                  endif

 Remarks         end may be used in place of endif.

 See Also        end, endfor, endswitch, endwhile, if.

 Example

                                  short i
                                  if  i = 5
                                      ; Do something
                                  endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.8. endswitch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

endswitch

The endswitch statement is used to end processing of a switch statement.

 Syntax

                                  endswitch

 Remarks         end may be used in place of endswitch.

 See Also        end, endfor, endswitch, endwhile, switch.

 Example

                                  switch s1
                                      case 0
                                          ; Do something for 0
                                      case 1
                                          ; Something for 1
                                      case 2 to 10
                                          ; Something for 2 to 10
                                      otherwise
                                          ; Anything else
                                  endswitch


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.9. endwhile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

endwhile

The endwhile statement is used to close a block of code for a while loop.

 Syntax

                                  endwhile

 Remarks         end may be used in place of endwhile.

 See Also        end, endfor, endif, endswitch, while.

 Example

                                  while i >>= 0
                                      arrayTwo[i] = arrayOne[i]
                                      i = i - 1
                                  endwhile


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.10. expression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

expression

An expression statement contains an expression. Expressions are used to assign
values to variables or to call functions.

 Syntax

                                  <expression>

 Remarks

 See Also        Expressions and Operators

 Example         The following are examples of expressions:

                                  Frame1.Text = "Frame Text"
                                  Tax = Income * TaxRate


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.11. for ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

for

The for statement is a looping construct which executes a group of statements
zero or more times depending on the values of start, end and step-value.

 Syntax

                                  for <variable> = <start> to <end> [step <step-value>]
                                      <statements>
                                  endfor or end

 Remarks         If the step increment is not specified, a default value of 1
                 is assumed, otherwise the <step-value> is used to increment
                 <variable>. The step value may be a negative value to cause
                 <variable> to be decremented with each iteration. The loop
                 variable is initialized to the <start> value and continues
                 until the value of <variable> equals the <end> value.

 See Also        do/until, if, switch, while

 Example         The example uses the for statement to count the number of
                 values of '1' in an array of SHORT called ShortValues.

                                  for i = 0 to ARRAY_SIZE
                                      if ShortValues[i] = 1 then
                                          count = count + 1
                                      endif
                                  endfor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.12. if ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

if

The if statement performs conditional execution of a group of statements
depending on a condition.

 Syntax

                                  if <condition> then
                                      <statements-1>
                                  [ else
                                      <statements-2> ]
                                  endif or end

 Remarks         <Condition> is evaluated, and if the result is non-zero,
                 <statements-1> are executed. If the result is zero,
                 <statements-2> are executed (if specified). To achieve an
                 elseif construct (which does not exist in JOT), if statements
                 can be nested. An if statement can be nested in either the if
                 clause or the else clause of another if statement.

 See Also        do/until, for, switch, while

 Example         The example uses the if statement to determine if a
                 denominator value in a division is zero, to trap the
                 possibility of a divide by 0 error.

                                  if den <> 0 then
                                      result = num / den
                                  else
                                      result = 0
                                  endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.13. return ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

return

The return statement ends execution of a function or action module, and passes
control back to the calling function (if applicable).

 Syntax

                                  return [<expression>]

 Remarks         An optional <expression> can be applied to the return
                 statement to return a value to the calling function or action
                 module.

 See Also

 Example         This example uses the return statement to end execution during
                 an if statement in a user defined function.

                                  if value <>  0 then
                                      return value
                                  endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.14. switch ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

switch

The switch statement is used to select from a series of statements based on the
value of an expression.

 Syntax

                                  switch <expression>
                                  { case <case-expr> { , <case-expr> }
                                      <statements> }
                                  [ otherwise
                                      <statements> ]
                                  endswitch

 Remarks         Each case expression value may be of the following :

                                  <expression>
                                  or    <expression> to <expression>
                 The case expressions must be of a similiar data type to the
                 test expression being examined. When a matching case
                 expression is found, no further case values will be tested
                 (even if they do match).

 See Also        do/until, for, if, while

 Example

                                  short s1 = 1
                                  string s2 = "abc"

                                  switch s1
                                      case 0
                                          ;Won't go here
                                      case 1
                                          ;This will be executed
                                      case 2 to 10
                                          ;Won't go here
                                      otherwise
                                          ;Won't go here
                                  end

                                  switch s2
                                      case "a"
                                          ;Won't go here
                                      case "z"
                                          ;Won't go here
                                      case "a" to "z"
                                          ;This will be executed
                                      case "A" to "Z"
                                          ;Won't go here
                                      case "abc"
                                          ;Won't go here (already done in "a" to "z" check)
                                      otherwise
                                          ;Won't go here
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2.5.15. while ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

while

The while statement is a looping construct which executes zero or more times
while a test expression is true.

 Syntax

                                  while <expression>
                                      <statements>
                                  endwhile or end

 Remarks         Unlike the do/until statement, <statements> may never be
                 executed if the condition does not equate to a non-zero value
                 when the condition is first tested.

 See Also        do/until, for, if, switch.

 Example         This example uses the while statement to loop through an
                 array, copying elements to another array, until the first
                 element is reached.

                                  while i >= 0
                                      arrayTwo[i] = arrayOne[i]
                                      i = i - 1
                                  endwhile


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. JOT Function Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

JOT  Function Reference

JOT functions are grouped into the following categories.

    Γûá String Handling Functions
    Γûá Mathematical Functions
    Γûá Type Conversion Functions
    Γûá Sound Functions
    Γûá Random Number Functions
    Γûá Message Functions
    Γûá Help Functions
    Γûá Process Control Functions
    Γûá Presentation Parameter Functions
    Γûá Drawing Functions


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1. String Handling Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

String Handling Functions

The string handling functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    InStr     Finds occurrences of a substring within a string

    Left      Creates a new string containing the left-most characters of a
              string

    Len       Returns the length of a string

    Lower     Converts a string to lowercase

    LTrim     Removes the leading spaces from a string

    Mid       Creates a new string containing characters from the middle of a
              string

    Repeat    Creates a string containing a character repeated a number of
              times

    Right     Creates a new string containing the right-most characters of a
              string

    RTrim     Removes the trailing spaces from a string

    Space     Returns a string consisting of a number of space characters

    Trim      Removes leading and trailing spaces from a string

    Upper     Converts a string to upper-case


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.1. InStr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

InStr

The InStr function searches for the occurrence of a substring within a string.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT InStr (STRING search, STRING match, SHORT start)

    Remarks      The InStr function searches the string specified by the search
                 parameter for any occurrences of match. The search begins at
                 the offset specified by start (zero-based).

                 To search the entire string, specify zero as the starting
                 index. A match exists only if the entire match string was
                 found.

                 The return value is the starting position of the first
                 character of the match string in the search string, or -1  if
                 there was no match.

    See Also     Left, Mid, Right

    Example

                                  InStr ("abcde", "cd", 0)  ; returns 2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.2. Left ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Left

The Left function creates a string which contains only the 'n' left-most
characters of the passed string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Left (STRING Str, SHORT Size)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression, while the Size parameter represents the number of
                 characters (from the leftmost character) to return.

                 A Size value of 0 will result in an empty string being
                 returned.

                 A Size value greater than or equal to the full size of the
                 string will result in the entire string being returned.

    See Also     Mid, Right.

    Example      The example uses the Left function to return the first 8
                 characters of the Text propert of an Entry Field. The result
                 is placed in aStr.

                                  STRING aStr

                                  aStr = Left (Frame1.EntryField1.Text, 8)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.3. Len ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Len

The Len function returns the length of the specified string.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT Len (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression.

                 The Len function is useful in conjunction with such functions
                 as Left, LTrim, Mid, Right, RTrim and Trim where the length of
                 a string is relevant.

    See Also     Left, LTrim, Mid, Right, RTrim, Trim.

    Example      The example uses the Len function to determine the length of
                 the string in EntryField1.

                                  SHORT Length

                                  Length = Len (Frame1.EntryField1.Text)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.4. Lower ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Lower

The Lower function converts the specified string to lowercase.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Lower (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Lower function returns the converted string, which is a
                 lowercase version of the string.

    See Also     Upper

    Example

                                  STRING Str

                                  Str = Lower ("ABCDEFG")
                                  ; Str now contains "abcdefg"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.5. LTrim ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LTrim

The LTrim function removes the leading spaces from a string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING LTrim (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression.

    See Also     Left, Len, Mid, Right, RTrim, Trim.

    Example      The example uses the LTrim function to remove the leading
                 spaces from the string in EntryField1 before converting the
                 string to a value.

                                  STRING aStr
                                  SHORT  aVal

                                  aStr = LTrim (Frame1.EntryField1.Text)
                                  aVal = Val(aStr)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.6. Mid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mid

The Mid function creates a string which contains characters extracted from the
middle of another string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Mid (STRING Str, SHORT Start, SHORT Size)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression, the Start parameter represents the first character
                 to extract and the Size parameter represents the number of
                 characters (from the character at the Start position) to
                 return.

                 The first character of a string is represented by the value 0.

                 A Start value greater than the length of the string will
                 result in an empty string being returned.

                 A Size value of 0 will result in the string "" (NULL string)
                 being returned.

                 A Size value greater than or equal to the full size of the
                 string will result in the remainder of the string (from the
                 Start position) being returned.

                 Use the Len function to find the number of characters in Str.

    See Also     Left, Len, Right.

    Example      The example uses the Mid function to return the 8 characters
                 from position 5 of the Text property of an Entry Field. The
                 result is placed in aStr.

                                  STRING aStr

                                  aStr = Mid (Frame1.EntryField1.Text, 5, 8)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.7. Repeat ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Repeat

The Repeat function creates a string consisting of a character repeated a
number of times.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Repeat (STRING char, SHORT len)

    Remarks      The Repeat function returns a string containing the first
                 character in the STRING 'char' repeated 'len' times. All
                 subsequent characters in the string 'char' are ignored.

    See Also     Space

    Example

                                  STRING s

                                  s = Repeat ("A", 5)    ;s is now equal to "AAAAA"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.8. Right ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Right

The Right function creates a string which contains only the right-most
characters of a passed string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Right (STRING Str, SHORT Size)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression, while the Size parameter represents the number of
                 characters (from the lrightmost character) to return.

                 A Size value of 0 will result in an empty string being
                 returned.

                 A Size value greater than or equal to the full size of the
                 string will result in the entire string being returned.

    See Also     Left, Mid

    Example      The example uses the Right function to return the last 5
                 characters of the Text property of an Entry Field. The result
                 is placed in aStr.

                                  STRING aStr

                                  aStr = Right (Frame1.EntryField1.Text, 5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.9. RTrim ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RTrim

The RTrim function removes the trailing spaces from a string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING RTrim (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression.

    See Also     Left, Len, LTrim, Mid, Right, Trim.

    Example      The example uses the RTrim function to remove the trailing
                 spaces from the string in EntryField1.

                                  STRING aStr

                                  aStr = RTrim (Frame1.EntryField1.Text)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.10. Space ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Space

The Space function returns a string consisting of the specified number of space
characters.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Space (SHORT len)

    Remarks      The Space function is equivalent to: Repeat (" ", len)

                 The length parameter does not include any null-terminating
                 character.

    See Also     Repeat


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.11. Trim ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Trim

The Trim function removes both the leading and trailing spaces from a string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Trim (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Str parameter represents a string value, constant or
                 expression.

    See Also     Left, Len, LTrim, Mid, Right, RTrim.

    Example      The example uses the Trim function to remove the leading and
                 trailing spaces from the string in EntryField1.

                                  STRING aStr

                                  aStr = Trim (Frame1.EntryField1.Text)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.1.12. Upper ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Upper

The Upper function converts a string to upper-case.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Upper (STRING str)

    Remarks      The Upper function returns the uppercase version of the
                 string.

    See Also     Lower.

    Example

                                  STRING Str

                                  Str = Upper ("abcdefg")
                                  ; Str now contains "ABCDEFG"


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2. Mathematical Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Mathematical Functions

The mathematical functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    Abs      Returns the absolute value of a number

    ACos     Returns the arc-cosine of a number

    ASin     Returns the arc-sine of a number

    ATan     Returns the arc-tangent of a number

    Ceil     Rounds a number up to the next integral number

    Cos      Returns the cosine of a number

    Deg      Converts values expressed in radians to degrees

    Exp      Returns the exponential value for a number

    Floor    Rounds a number down to the previous integral number

    Frac     Returns the fractional portion of a number

    Int      Returns the integer portion of a number

    Log      Returns the natural logarithm of a number

    Pow      Returns the value of a number raised to the power of a second
             number

    Rad      Converts values expressed in degrees to radians

    Sin      Returns the sine of a number

    Sqr      Returns the square-root of a number

    Tan      Returns the tangent of a number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.1. Abs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Abs

The Abs function returns the absolute value (value less any sign) of the
specified number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Abs (REAL number)

    Remarks

    See Also

    Example

                                  x = Abs (0)       ; x = 0
                                  x = Abs (1)       ; x = 1
                                  x = Abs (-1)      ; x = 1
                                  x = Abs (1.2)     ; x = 1.2
                                  x = Abs (-3.4)    ; x = 3.4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.2. ACos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ACos

The ACos function returns the arc-cosine of x expressed in radians from 0 to
{pi}.

    Syntax

                                  REAL ACos (REAL x)

    Remarks      The input value, x, must be within the range of -1 to 1.

    See Also     Sin, Cos, Tan, ASin, ATan

    Example

                                  x = ACos (0.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.3. ASin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ASin

The ASin function returns the arc-sine of the supplied number, expressed in
radians from  -Pi/2 to +Pi/2.

    Syntax

                                  REAL ASin (REAL x)

    Remarks      The input value, x, must be within the range of -1 to 1.

    See Also     Sin, Cos, Tan, ACos, ATan

    Example

                                  x = ASin (0.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.4. ATan ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ATan

The ATan function returns the arc-tangent of the supplied number, expressed in
radians from  -pi/2 to +pi/2.

    Syntax

                                  REAL ATan (REAL x)

    Remarks

    See Also     Sin, Cos, Tan, ACos, ASin

    Example

                                  x = ATan (1.0)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.5. Ceil ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Ceil

The Ceil Function is used to round numbers up to the next integral number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Ceil (REAL number)

    Remarks      The Ceil function rounds the number supplied as the argument
                 to the smallest integer number greater than or equal to it.

    See Also     Floor

    Example

                                  x = Ceil (2.8)   ; x =  3
                                  x = Ceil (-2.8)  ; x = -2


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.6. Cos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Cos

The Cos function returns the cosine of a number expressed in radians.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Cos (REAL x)

    Remarks      The input value, x, may be arbitrarily large (both negative
                 and positive), however some loss of significance may result
                 with large values.

    See Also     Sin, Tan, ACos, ASin, ATan

    Example

                                  x = Cos (0.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.7. Deg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deg

The Deg function converts radians to degrees.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Deg (REAL radians)

    Remarks      This function returns the value calculated using the formula:

                                  180 * radians
                                  -------------
                                       PI

    See Also     Rad, PI Constant

    Example      This example calculates the number of degrees in PI/2 radians
                 and places the result in Quad:

                                  REAL Quad

                                  Quad = Deg (PI / 2)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.8. Exp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Exp

The Exp function returns the exponential function value for the specified
argument.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Exp (REAL Number)

    Remarks      The Exp function returns the value of e raised to the power of
                 Number where e is the value 2.17128128...

    See Also     Log

    Example

                                  REAL x
                                  REAL y

                                  y = Exp (x)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.9. Floor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Floor

The Floor Function is used to round numbers down to the previous integral
number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Floor (REAL number)

    Remarks      The Floor function rounds the number supplied as the argument
                 to the largest integer number less than or equal to it.

    See Also     Ceil

    Example

                                  x = Floor (2.8)   ; x =  2
                                  x = Floor (-2.8)  ; x = -3


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.10. Frac ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Frac

The Frac Function returns the fractional portion of the supplied number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Frac (REAL number)

    Remarks      The Frac function discards the whole integer portion of the
                 supplied number, while preserving its sign.

    See Also     Int

    Example

                                  x = Frac (0.0)  ; x =  0.0
                                  x = Frac (1.0)  ; x =  0.0
                                  x = Frac (2.3)  ; x =  0.3
                                  x = Frac (-4.5) ; x = -0.5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.11. Int ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Int

The Int Function returns the integer portion of the supplied number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Int (REAL number)

    Remarks      The Int function discards the fractional portion of the
                 supplied number, while preserving its sign.

    See Also     Frac

    Example

                                  x = Int (0.1)  ; x = 0
                                  x = Int (1.0)  ; x = 1
                                  x = Int (2.3)  ; x = 2
                                  x = Int (-4.5) ; x = -4


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.12. Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Log

The Log function returns the natural logarithm (base e) of the specified
argument.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Log (REAL Number)

    Remarks

    See Also     Exp

    Example

                                  REAL x
                                  REAL y

                                  y = Log (x)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.13. Pow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pow

The Pow function returns the value of its first argument raised to the power of
its second argument.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Pw (REAL x, REAL y)

    Remarks

    See Also     Sqr

    Example

                                  REAL x
                                  REAL y
                                  REAL z

                                  z = Pow (x, y)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.14. Rad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rad

The Rad function converts degrees to radians

    Syntax

                                  REAL Rad (REAL degrees)

    Remarks      This function returns the value calculated using the formula:

                                  degrees * PI
                                  ------------
                                      180

    See Also     Deg, PI Constant

    Example      This example calculates the number of degrees in PI/2 radians
                 and places the result in Quad:

                                  REAL Quad

                                  Quad = Rad (PI / 2)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.15. Sin ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sin

The Sin function returns the sine of the supplied number, expressed in radians.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Sin (REAL x)

    Remarks

    See Also     Cos, Tan, ASin, ACos, ATan

    Example

                                  x = Sin (0.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.16. Sqr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sqr

The Sqr function returns the square-root of the supplied parameter.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Sqr (REAL number)

    Remarks      The Sqr function returns the non-negative square root of the
                 specified number, or zero if the number is negative.

    See Also     Pow.

    Example

                                  REAL y
                                  REAL x

                                  y = Sqr (x)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.2.17. Tan ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Tan

The Tan function returns the tangent of the supplied number, expressed in
radians.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Tan (REAL x)

    Remarks      When the value of 'x' is large, a partial loss of significance
                 may result.

    See Also     Cos, Sin, ASin, ACos, ATan

    Example

                                  x = Tan (0.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3. Type Conversion Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type Conversion Functions

The type conversion functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    Asc         Returns the ASCII code of a character

    Chr         Creates a string from an ASCII value

    Str         Converts a number into a string

    ToString    Creates a STRING variable from the contents of a structure

    ToStruct    Returns a structure extracted from a STRING variable

    Val         Converts a string value into a number


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.1. Asc ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Asc

The Asc function returns the ASCII code of the first character of the passed
string.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT Asc (STRING str)

    Remarks      Only the first character of the passed string is used by this
                 function; subsequent characters are ignored. ASCII character
                 codes range from 0 to 255.

    See Also     Chr

    Example      This example uses the Asc function to return the ASCII value
                 of the character 'A'.

                                  SHORT AscA
                                  AscA = Asc ("A")


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.2. Chr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Chr

The Chr function creates a string containing the character represented by the
specified ASCII value.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Chr (SHORT code)

    Remarks      The Chr Function returns a string containing the specified
                 ASCII character. ASCII character codes range from 0 to 255.

    See Also     Asc

    Example      The following example creates a string made up of the new-line
                 character (ASCII 10)

                                  STRING Str[10]

                                  Str = Chr (10)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.3. Str ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Str

The Str function converts a numeric value into a string.

    Syntax

                                  STRING Str (REAL Value)

    Remarks      The sign of the Value parameter is taken into acount by the
                 Str function, ie. negative values will be converted with the
                 minus sign leading the numeric characters.

    See Also     Val.

    Example      The example uses the Str function to convert the number 3.5
                 into text , and places this in an Entry Field's Text property.

                                  Frame1.EntryField1.Text = Str (3.5)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.4. ToString ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ToString

The ToString function creates a STRING variable from the contents of a
structure.

    Syntax

                                  STRING ToString ( structure )

    Remarks      The ToString function creates a null-terminated string
                 consisting of each of the members of the passed structure
                 concatenated together. This function will only work correctly
                 if the structure contains members defined as fixed length
                 strings. Any numeric information or pointers within the
                 structure are likely to cause unpredictable characters to
                 appear within the returned string.

    See Also     ToStruct

    Example      The example uses the ToString function to create a string
                 which is used to append a string to a listbox.

                                  CUSTOMER Cust
                                  STRING   aStr

                                  aStr = ToString (Cust)
                                  Frame1.Listbox1.AppendItem (aStr) ; Places it in listbox


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.5. ToStruct ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ToStruct

The ToStruct function returns a structure extracted from a STRING variable.

    Syntax

                                  ToStruct( STRING *string, type )

    Remarks      The ToStruct function simply returns a pointer to the supplied
                 string, cast as the appropriate structure. Therefore, the
                 supplied string must be at least as long as the structure in
                 size. Because of this requirement, the ToStruct function is
                 passed the address of the STRING parameter so that it may be
                 modified in the event that it is shorter than the supplied
                 structure.  If the string is shorter than the supplied
                 structure, it is lengthened by adding spaces to the end.

                 This function will only work correctly if the structure
                 contains members defined as fixed length strings. Any numeric
                 or pointer fields within the structure are not guaranteed to
                 contain valid data on return from this function.

    See Also     ToStruct

    Example      The example uses the ToStruct function to create a structure
                 from text data in a listbox.

                                  CUSTOMER Cust
                                  STRING   aStr

                                  aStr = Frame1.Listbox1.GetItemText(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection)
                                  Cust = ToStruct (aStr, CUSTOMER) ; Places text data in structure


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.3.6. Val ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Val

The Val function converts a string value into a number.

    Syntax

                                  REAL Val (STRING Str)

    Remarks      The Str parameter is a string value, constant or expression.
                 The Val function stops reading the string at the first
                 non-numeric character read. It also strips all leading spaces
                 from the string before conversion.

    See Also     Str.

    Example      The example uses the Val function to convert an entry by the
                 user in the EntryField1 control, and places the result in
                 aVal.

                                  REAL aVal

                                  aVal = Val (Frame1.EntryField1.Text)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.4. Sound Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sound Functions

The sound functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    Beep      Generates a simple beep from the PC speaker

    Sound     Generates a tone on the PC speaker


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.4.1. Beep ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Beep

The Beep function generates a simple beep from the PC speaker.

    Syntax

                                  VOID Beep (SHORT type)

    Remarks      The beep type may be one of the following:

        1. Warning

        2. Note

        3. Error

                 If more control is required over the sound generated, the
                 Sound function should be used instead.

    See Also     Sound

    Example

                                  Beep ( 1 )  ; Sounds a Note! beep


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.4.2. Sound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sound

The Sound function generates a tone on the PC speaker.

    Syntax

                                  VOID Sound (LONG frequency, LONG duration)

    Remarks      The Sound function generates a tone at the specified frequency
                 (in Hertz) and for the duration (in milli-seconds) specified.
                 The frequency should be within the range 40 to 8000 Hz.

    See Also     Beep

    Example

                                  Sound (500, 1000)  ;Generate tone for 1 second


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.5. Random Number Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Random Number Functions

The random number functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    Random     Returns a random number

    Seed       Seeds the random number generator


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.5.1. Random ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Random

The Random function returns a random number.

    Syntax

                                  LONG Random (LONG min, LONG max)

    Remarks      The number returned by the Random function is guaranteed to be
                 within specified minimum and maximum values (inclusive).

    See Also     Seed

    Example

                                  LONG Num

                                  Num = Random (0, 100)  ; 0 <= Num <= 100


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.5.2. Seed ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Seed

This function seeds the random number generator.

    Syntax

                                  VOID Seed (LONG seedvalue)

    Remarks      If the same seed value is used for each call to the Seed
                 function, the series of numbers produced by the Random
                 function will be the same each time.

                 Specifying 0 as the seed value will cause the current time to
                 be used as a seed value.

    See Also     Random

    Example

                                  Seed (0) ; Uses the current system time as the seed


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.6. Message Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message Functions

The message functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    InvokeMessage    Displays a popup message box containing a specified
                     message

    LoadMessage      Loads a string from the program's message file

    ShowMessage      Displays a popup message box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.6.1. InvokeMessage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

InvokeMessage

The InvokeMessage function displays a popup message box containing a specified
message.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT InvokeMessage (WINDOW owner, MESSAGE msgID)

    Parameters

        1. The window which will become the owner of the message box, or
           NullWindow if no owner is required.

        2. The ID of the message to display.

    Returns      ID of the button selected by the user. It can be any one of
                 the following values:

    Remarks      This function displays a popup message box which contains the
                 specified message. This function is useful for quickly
                 displaying a message which does not need to be modified.

                 If the text of the message does need to be modified, the
                 LoadMessage and ShowMessage combination should be used.
                 InvokeMessage calls both of these functions and uses the
                 default title.

                 The popup message box has its owner set to the value specified
                 by the owner parameter. The message box becomes modal to this
                 window.

    See Also     LoadMessage, ShowMessage.

    Example      This example displays a message to the user and tests the
                 user's response. short response

                                  response = InvokeMessage (Frame1, Msg00001)
                                  if (response = MB_Yes) then end

                                  ;User has selected 'Yes' from the message box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.6.2. LoadMessage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LoadMessage

The LoadMessage function loads a string from the program's message file.

    Syntax

                                  STRING LoadMessage ( MESSAGE Msgname )

    See Also     InvokeMessage, ShowMessage

    Example

                                  STRING Str

                                  Str = LoadMessage (Msg00001)
                                  Str = Str + FileName
                                  ShowMessage (Frame1, Msg0001, Null, Str)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.6.3. ShowMessage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowMessage

The ShowMessage function displays a popup message box.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT ShowMessage ( WINDOW Owner,
                                                      MESSAGE Msgname,
                                                      STRING Title,
                                                      STRING Text )

    Remarks      The ShowMessage function displays the message contained in the
                 'Text' parameter in the  specified by 'Msgname'. The message
                 box is displayed with its owner set to the window specified by
                 the 'Owner' parameter and therefore becomes modal to this
                 window.

                 The 'Title' parameter specifies the text to appear at the top
                 of the message box. If Null is specified, the system will
                 default the title, depending upon the message's icon style.

                 The text of the message, as specified by the Text parameter,
                 must be loaded from the message file using LoadMessage. This
                 text can be modified as required by the context in which the
                 message is being generated and then displayed using the
                 ShowMessage function.

                 The returned value is the ID of the message box button which
                 was selected by the user. It can be any one of the following
                 values:

    See Also     InvokeMessage, LoadMessage

    Example

                                  STRING Str

                                  Str = LoadMessage (Msg00001)
                                  Str = Str + FileName
                                  ShowMessage (Frame1, Msg0001, Null, Str)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7. Help Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Functions

The help functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    ShowHelp             Displays a help panel

    ShowHelpContents     Displays the Help Contents

    ShowHelpForKeys      Displays the Keys Help

    ShowHelpForHelp      Displays the 'Using Help' help panel

    ShowHelpIndex        Displays the Help Index


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7.1. ShowHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowHelp

The ShowHelp function is used to display a specified help panel.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ShowHelp (SHORT HelpId)

    Remarks      The ShowHelp function is typically used in response to the
                 user selecting a menu item from the Help menu. This allows the
                 application designer to specify which Help Panel to load for a
                 particular help option.

    See Also     ShowHelpContents, ShowHelpForKeys, ShowHelpForHelp,
                 ShowHelpIndex

    Example

                                  ShowHelp (ExtendedHelp)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7.2. ShowHelpContents ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowHelpContents

The ShowHelpContents function is used to display the Help Contents.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ShowHelpContents ()

    Remarks      The ShowHelpContents function is typically used in response to
                 the user selecting the Help Contents menu item from the Help
                 menu.

    See Also     ShowHelp, ShowHelpForKeys, ShowHelpForHelp, ShowHelpIndex

    Example

                                  ShowHelpContents ()


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7.3. ShowHelpForHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowHelpForHelp

The ShowHelpForHelp function is used to display the 'Using Help' help panel.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ShowHelpForHelp ()

    Remarks      The ShowHelpForHelp function is typically used in response to
                 the user selecting the Help For Help menu item from the Help
                 menu.

    See Also     ShowHelp, ShowHelpContents, ShowHelpForKeys, ShowHelpIndex

    Example

                                  ShowHelpForHelp ()


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7.4. ShowHelpForKeys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowHelpForKeys

The ShowHelpForKeys function is used to display the Keys Help for the
application.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ShowHelpForKeys ()

    Remarks      The ShowHelpForKeys function is typically used in response to
                 the user selecting the Keys Help menu item from the Help menu.

    See Also     ShowHelp, ShowHelpContents, ShowHelpForHelp, ShowHelpIndex

    Example

                                  ShowHelpForKeys ()


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.7.5. ShowHelpIndex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowHelpIndex

The ShowHelpIndex function is used to display the Help Index.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ShowHelpIndex ()

    Remarks      The ShowHelpIndex function is typically used in response to
                 the user selecting the Help Index menu item from the Help
                 menu.

    See Also     ShowHelp, ShowHelpContents, ShowHelpForKeys, ShowHelpForHelp

    Example

                                  ShowHelpIndex ()


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8. Process Control Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Process Control Functions

The process control functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    CmdLineArg         Returns command-line argument strings

    CmdLineCnt         Returns the count of command-line arguments

    CreateThread       Creates a new application thread

    DestroyThread      Frees up memory used by a thread function

    ExitProgram        Exits the current application program

    ExitThread         Exits from a thread

    RunProgram         Runs another program from the current application

    SleepThread        Suspends execution for a thread

    WaitProgram        Waits for an asynchronous program to finish

    WaitThread         Waits for a thread to finish

    WakeThread         Resumes execution of a thread


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.1. CmdLineArg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CmdLineArg

The CmdLineArg function returns the specified argument string, passed to the
current application on startup.

    Syntax

                                  STRING CmdLineArg (SHORT arg)

    Remarks      Command line arguments are parsed on application startup and
                 are made available throught the CmdLineArg Function. The count
                 of arguments passed can be found via the CmdLineCnt function.
                 The first command line argument (argument 0) is the name of
                 the program which was executed).

    See Also     CmdLineCnt

    Example      This example checks the command line arguments for the string
                 "-h" and sets an internal variable to signify that help should
                 be displayed for the application.

                                  SHORT  DisplayHelp
                                  SHORT  Counter
                                  SHORT  Arguments
                                  STRING CurrArg

                                  DisplayHelp = False
                                  Arguments = CmdLineCnt()
                                  for Counter = 1 to Arguments
                                      CurrArg = CmdLineArg (Counter)
                                      if CurrArg = "-h"
                                      then
                                          DisplayHelp = True
                                      endif
                                  endfor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.2. CmdLineCnt ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CmdLineCnt

The CmdLineCnt function returns the number of arguments passed to the current
application on startup.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT CmdLineCnt ()

    Remarks      The number of command line arguments will always be at least
                 one, the first argument being the name of the program which
                 was executed.

    See Also     CmdLineArg

    Example      This example checks the command line arguments for the string
                 "-h" and sets an internal variable to signify that help should
                 be displayed for the application.

                                  SHORT DisplayHelp
                                  SHORT Counter
                                  SHORT Arguments
                                  STRING CurrArg

                                  DisplayHelp = False
                                  Arguments = CmdLineCnt()
                                  for Counter = 1 to Arguments
                                      CurrArg = CmdLineArg (Counter)
                                      if CurrArg = "-h"
                                      then
                                          DisplayHelp = True
                                      endif
                                  endfor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.3. CreateThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

CreateThread

The CreateThread function is used to start up a new application thread.

    Syntax

                                  THREAD CreateThread (MODULE ThreadName,
                                                       LONG   StackSize,
                                                       WINDOW Notify)

    Remarks      CreateThread starts the ThreadName module as a separate
                 thread. The StackSize parameter specifies the stack size to
                 allocate for the thread. Specifying 0 for this parameters
                 allocates the default size of 16k). The Notify parameter
                 specifies a top-level window which will be notified when the
                 thread has ended. If this parameter is NULL no notification
                 will be sent.  This function returns a thread information
                 handle which can be used with the DestroyThread function.

                 The 'ThreadName' module must be created as a new Thread within
                 the Guidelines Action Editor.

    See Also     DestroyThread, ExitThread, SleepThread, WakeThread,
                 WaitThread.

    Example      This example creates a thread to run the 'WaitChar' function,
                 allocating the default stack size, with no window notification
                 on completion.

                                  THREAD WaitId

                                  WaitId = CreateThread (WaitChar, 0, NullWindow)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.4. DestroyThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DestroyThread

The DestroyThread function frees up memory used by a thread function.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT DestroyThread (THREAD Thd)

    Remarks      DestroyThread can be called while the thread is running (in
                 which case the thread is immediately terminated) or after the
                 thread has ended when the ThreadEnded event has been received.
                 This function is designed for other threads (or the main
                 thread) to terminate the specified thread. If the thread is
                 still running, a ThreadEnded event does not occur.

                 The function returns True if successful, otherwise False.

    See Also     CreateThread, ExitThread, SleepThread, WakeThread, WaitThread.

    Example

                                  SHORT  ThdEnded
                                  THREAD Thd

                                  ThdEnded = DestroyThread (Thd)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.5. ExitProgram ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ExitProgram

The ExitProgram function terminates a window's message processing.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ExitProgram ( SHORT Retcode )

    Remarks      The ExitProgram function sends a WM_QUIT message to the main
                 window's message queue to terminate the message processing.
                 The return code passed becomes the program's exit value.

                 ExitProgram does not take effect until the application has had
                 an opportunity to read from its message queue. This will not
                 occur until it returns from the action module in which
                 ExitProgram was called. It is necessary, therefore, to place a
                 return statement after the call to ExitProgram if you wish the
                 function to be processed immediately.

    See Also     ExitThread

    Example

                                  VOID Frame1.PushButton1.Click ()
                                  LoadMessage (ExitPrompt)
                                  if InvokeMessage (Frame1, ExitPrompt) = MB_Yes
                                      then
                                      ExitProgram(0)
                                      endif
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.6. ExitThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ExitThread

The ExitThread function is used to exit from a thread.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ExitThread (THREAD Thd, LONG RetCode)

    Remarks      The ExitThread function should be used within the specified
                 thread to terminate execution. If control exits from the
                 thread without calling an ExitThread call, then an ExitThread
                 is assumed.

                 ExitThread terminates the specified thread and notifies the
                 window specified in the CreateThread function by way of a
                 ThreadEnded event. No further instructions are executed after
                 the ExitThread call.

    See Also     CreateThread, DestroyThread, SleepThread, WakeThread,
                 WaitThread.

    Example

                                  ExitThread (Thd)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.7. RunProgram ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RunProgram

The RunProgram function is used to run another executable program from the
current application.

    Syntax

                                  LONG RunProgram (STRING Pgm,
                                                   STRING Parms,
                                                   LONG   Mode)

    Remarks      The RunProgram function allows you to start an executable
                 program as a separately running process.

                 If the program name ('Pgm') does not specify a full pathname,
                 the executable file will be located on the PATH environment
                 variable. The Parms string contains a list of parameters
                 separated by spaces which are to be passed as command line
                 arguments. The mode parameter specifies the mode of the
                 process and can be any one of the following predefined
                 constants:

        1. The calling thread waits for the process to end. In this case, the
           return value represents the return code with which the program
           ended.

        2. The calling thread continues immediately after the call and the new
           process runs independently. The return value for this mode
           represents the process ID of the started program. This process ID
           can be used with the WaitProgram function.

        3. The process is started as an independent background task.  The
           return value for this mode represents the process ID of the started
           program. This process ID can then be used with the WaitProgram
           function.

           If an error occurs or the program cannot be found, a value of -1 is
           returned.

        4. Programs should not be started synchronously from the main thread
           since the thread is blocked until the program ends.  This results in
           the PM session hanging because the PM message queue is blocked. As a
           result, programs should be executed either asynchronously, or by
           starting a new thread (using CreateThread) to wait for completion of
           the process.

    See Also     CreateThread, WaitProgram

    Example

                                  LONG result

                                  result = RunProgram ("C:\\TEST.EXE",
                                                       "parm1 parm2",
                                                        Synchronous)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.8. SleepThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SleepThread

The SleepThread function suspends execution for the specified thread.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT SleepThread (THREAD Thd)

    Remarks      The SleepThread function suspends execution of the thread
                 specified by 'Thd'. The thread remains frozen until a
                 subsequent WakeThread function call is made.

                 SleepThread returns True if successful, otherwise False.

    See Also     CreateThread, DestroyThread, ExitThread, WakeThread,
                 WaitThread


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.9. WaitProgram ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WaitProgram

The WaitProgram function waits for or checks if an asynchronous program which
was previously started using the RunProgram function has finished.

    Syntax

                                  LONG WaitProgram (LONG  processID,
                                                    SHORT wait)

    Remarks      The passed processID parameter is the value returned from the
                 RunProgram call. The wait parameter can be either True (wait
                 for the process to finish) or False (do not wait, just check
                 if the program has finished).

                 The wait=True option is designed for use within a seperate
                 thread (when I implement them) that can wait for the program
                 to end and then notify the caller's main window.

        1. WaitProgram should not be called from the main thread with 'wait'
           set to True, since the thread will blocked until the program ends.
           This results in the PM session hanging because the PM message queue
           is blocked. As a result, WaitProgram should be called with 'wait'
           set to False, or by starting a new thread (using CreateThread) to
           wait for completion of the process.

                 If the program has not finished or an error occurs, -1 is
                 returned, otherwise the return code from the program is
                 returned.

    See Also     RunProgram.

    Example

                                  LONG pid
                                  LONG result

                                  pid = RunProgram ("C:\\TEST.EXE",
                                                    "parm1 parm2",
                                                     Asynchronous)
                                  result = WaitProgram (pid, True)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.10. WaitThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WaitThread

The WaitThread function waits until the specified thread has terminated.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT WaitThread (THREAD Thd)

    Remarks      The WaitThread function returns True if successful, otherwise
                 False.

                 Note:  WaitThread should not be called from the main thread,
                 since the main thread will be blocked until the specified
                 thread ends. This results in the PM session hanging because
                 the PM message queue is blocked. As a result, WaitThread
                 should be called by starting a new thread (using CreateThread)
                 to wait for completion of the thread.

    See Also     CreateThread, DestroyThread, ExitThread, SleepThread,
                 WakeThread.

    Example

                                  SHORT ThdEnded
                                  THREAD Thd

                                  ThdEnded = WaitThread (Thd)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.8.11. WakeThread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WakeThread

The WakeThread function resumes execution of a thread which has been previously
suspended using the SleepThread function.

    Syntax

                                  SHORT WakeThread (THREAD Thd)

    Remarks      The WakeThread function returns True if successful, otherwise
                 False.

    See Also     CreateThread, DestroyThread, ExitThread, SleepThread,
                 WaitThread.

    Example

                                  SHORT ThdWoken
                                  THREAD Thd

                                  ThdWoken = WakeThread (Thd)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.9. Presentation Parameter Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation Parameter Functions

The presentation parameter functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    EnumFonts         Returns font names from the installed font list

    FontCount         Returns the number of installed fonts

    RGB               Creates a color from its components


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.9.1. EnumFonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EnumFonts

The EnumFonts function returns font names from the installed font list.

    Syntax

                                  STRING EnumFonts (LONG index)

    Remarks      The EnumFonts function returns the n'th font name within the
                 known installed font list. The count of available fonts can be
                 determined via the FontCount function.

                 This function returns the font name at the specified index, or
                 Null if an error has occurred or the index is out of range.

    See Also     FontCount

    Example      This example inserts the list of known fonts into a listbox:

                                  LONG i
                                  LONG cnt

                                  ;Insert all known font names into a listbox.
                                  cnt = FontCount ()
                                  for i = 0 to cnt
                                      Frame1.Listbox1.AppendItem (EnumFonts (i))
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.9.2. FontCount ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FontCount

The FontCount function returns the number of installed fonts.

    Syntax

                                  LONG FontCount ()

    Remarks      The FontCount function returns the total number of fonts
                 installed within the system. This count includes both public
                 and private fonts. This count can be used in conjunction with
                 the EnumFonts function to enumerate each of the available font
                 names.

                 This function returns 0 if an error occurs.

    See Also     EnumFonts

    Example      This example inserts the list of known fonts into a listbox:

                                  LONG i
                                  LONG cnt

                                  ;Insert all known font names into a listbox.
                                  cnt = FontCount ()
                                  for i = 0 to cnt
                                      Frame1.Listbox1.AppendItem (FontCount (i))
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.9.3. RGB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

RGB

The RGB function creates a color from its individual red, green and blue
components.

    Syntax

                                  LONG RGB (SHORT red,
                                                 SHORT green,
                                                 SHORT blue)

    Remarks      The returned value can be used with the SetColor method. The
                 red, green and blue values must range between 0 and 255.

    See Also     SetColor, GetColor

    Example      The example uses the RGB function to return an RGB value for a
                 combination of red, green and blue primary colors. The
                 background color of the frame window is then set to that
                 color.

                                  LONG FrameColor

                                  FrameColor = RGB (104, 64, 128)
                                  Frame1.SetColor (PP_Background, FrameColor)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10. Drawing Functions ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Drawing Functions

The drawing functions provided by JOT are listed below:

    ClearPS           Erases the current presentation space

    DrawBox           Draws a rectangular box in a presentation space

    DrawCircle        Draws a circle in a presentation space

    DrawEllipse       Draws an ellipse in a presentation space

    DrawImage         Draws an image in a presentation space

    DrawLine          Draws a line in a presentation space

    DrawText          Draws text in a presentation space

    FillBox           Draws a filled box in a presentation space

    FillCircle        Draws a filled circle in a presentation space

    FillEllipse       Draws a filled ellipse in a presentation space

    GetBackColor      Gets the background color of a presentation space

    GetDrawColor      Gets the drawing color of a presentation space

    GetFillPattern    Gets the fill pattern of a presentation space

    GetImageSize      Gets the dimensions of an image

    GetLineType       Gets the line type of a presentation space

    GetPS             Gets a presentation space for a window

    GetSysColor       Gets a system color

    LineTo            Draws a line from the current point to a new point

    LoadImage         Loads an image resource from disk into memory

    MoveTo            Moves to a new location in a presentation space

    ReleasePS         Releases a presentation space

    SetBackColor      Sets the background color of a presentation space

    SetDrawColor      Sets the drawing color of a presentation space

    SetFillPattern    Sets the fill pattern of a presentation space

    SetLineType       Sets the line type of a presentation space

    SetSysColor       Sets a system color


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.1. ClearPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ClearPS

The ClearPS function clears the entire presentation space to the current
background color.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ClearPS (LONG ps)

    Remarks      This function is useful to erase the drawing area during a
                 paint message before calling any other drawing functions.

    See Also     GetPS, SetDrawColor, SetBackColor

    Example      The following example clears the presentation space and then
                 draws a filled circle when a frame Paint event occurs.

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                          SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                          SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                          ClearPS(ps)
                                          MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                          FillCircle (ps, 10)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.2. DrawBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawBox

The DrawBox function draws a rectangular box in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawBox (LONG ps,
                                                     LONG x,
                                                     LONG y,
                                                     LONG round)

    Remarks      This function draws a box which spans from the current
                 graphics position to a diagonally opposite corner specified by
                 the x,y parameters.

                 The round parameter allows the rectangle to be drawn with
                 rounded corners (0 indicates no rounded corners, while a
                 non-zero value represents the radius (in window coordinates)
                 of the corners).

                 The box border is drawn using the current line color and line
                 type. Only the border of the box is drawn - the interior is
                 not updated. Use the FillBox function to draw a filled box.

    See Also     FillBox, MoveTo, LineTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor, SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a box in the frame window when a Paint
                 event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      DrawBox (ps, 100, 100, 0)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.3. DrawCircle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawCircle

The DrawCircle function draws a circle in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawCircle (LONG ps, LONG radius)

    Remarks      This function draws the outline of a circle centered at the
                 current graphics position.

                 The radius parameter specifies the radius (from the center
                 point) measured in window coordinates. The circle border is
                 drawn using the current drawing color and line type.

                 The interior of the circle is not updated. The current
                 graphics position is not updated by this function.

    See Also     DrawEllipse, FillCircle, MoveTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor,
                 SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a circle in the frame window when a Paint
                 event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      DrawCircle (ps, 10)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.4. DrawEllipse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawEllipse

The DrawEllipse function draws an ellipse in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawEllipse (LONG ps, LONG x, LONG y)

    Remarks      This function draws the outline of an ellipse which is
                 positioned to fit within a rectangle spanning from the current
                 graphics position to a diagonally opposite corner specified by
                 the X/Y parameters.

                 The ellipse border is drawn using the current drawing color
                 and line type. The interior of the ellipse is not updated. The
                 current graphics position is not updated by this function.

    See Also     DrawCircle, FillEllipse, MoveTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor,
                 SetLineType

    Example      This example draws an ellipse in the frame window when a Paint
                 event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      DrawEllipse (ps, 100, 150)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.5. DrawImage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawImage

The DrawImage function draws an image in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawImage (LONG ps, IMAGE img)

    Remarks      This function draws the specified image at the current
                 graphics position.

                 For all image types except pointers, The lower-left corner of
                 the image is positioned at this point. For pointers, the image
                 will be drawn such that the pointer's hotspot is aligned with
                 the current graphics position.

    See Also     DrawText, GetPS, LoadImage, MoveTo

    Example      This example draws an image (named FrameIcon) at the origin of
                 the frame window when a Paint event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 0, 0)
                                      DrawImage (ps, FrameIcon)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.6. DrawLine ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawLine

The DrawLine function draws a line in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawLine (LONG ps,
                                                 LONG x1,
                                                 LONG y1,
                                                 LONG x2,
                                                 LONG y2)

    Remarks      This function draws a line from the specified starting point
                 (x1, y1) to the specified ending point (x2, y2). The line is
                 drawn using the current line color and line type.

                 This function is equivalent to the following code:

                                  MoveTo (hps, x1, y1)
                                  LineTo (hps, x2, y2)

    See Also     MoveTo, LineTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor, SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a line in the frame window when a Paint
                 event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      DrawLine(ps, 10, 10, 100, 100)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.7. DrawText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DrawText

The DrawText function draws text in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID DrawText (LONG ps, STRING text)

    Remarks      This function draws the specified string starting at the
                 current graphics point. When completed, the current graphics
                 point is positioned at the end of the text, so that a further
                 DrawText call will display the new text to the right of the
                 previous text.

                 Word-wrapping and line-feeds are not supported by this
                 function.

                 The text is drawn using the current foreground and background
                 colors.

                 The default font style for the presentation space is used to
                 draw the text.

    See Also     MoveTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor, SetBackColor

    Example      This example draws a line of text in the frame window when a
                 Paint event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 10, 10)
                                      DrawText(ps, "Hello World")
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.8. FillBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FillBox

The FillBox function draws a filled rectangular box in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID FillBox (LONG ps,
                                                LONG x,
                                                LONG y,
                                                LONG round)

    Remarks      This function draws a box which spans from the current
                 graphics position to a diagonally opposite corner specified by
                 the x,y parameters.

                 The round parameter allows the rectangle to be drawn with
                 rounded corners (0 indicates no rounded corners, while a
                 non-zero value represents the radius (in window coordinates)
                 of the corners).

                 The box border and interior are drawn using the current draw
                 color and line type.

    See Also     DrawBox, MoveTo, LineTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor, SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a filled box in the frame window when a
                 Paint event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      FillBox (ps, 100, 100, 0)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.9. FillCircle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FillCircle

The FillCircle function draws a filled circle in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID FillCircle (LONG ps, LONG radius)

    Remarks      This function draws the outline of a circle centered at the
                 current graphics position.

                 The radius parameter specifies the radius (from the center
                 point) measured in window coordinates.

                 The circle border and interior are drawn using the current
                 drawing color. The current graphics position is not updated by
                 this function.

    See Also     DrawCircle, FillEllipse, MoveTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor,
                 SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a filled circle in the frame window when a
                 Paint event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      FillCircle (ps, 10)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.10. FillEllipse ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FillEllipse

The FillEllipse function draws a filled ellipse in a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID FillEllipse (LONG ps, LONG x, LONG y)

    Remarks      This function draws a filled ellipse which is positioned to
                 fit within a rectangle spanning from the current graphics
                 position to a diagonally opposite corner specified by the X/Y
                 parameters.

                 The ellipse border and interior are drawn using the current
                 drawing color. The current graphics position is not updated by
                 this function.

    See Also     DrawEllipse, FillCircle, MoveTo, GetPS, SetDrawColor,
                 SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a filled ellipse in the frame window when a
                 Paint event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      FillEllipse (ps, 100, 150)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.11. GetBackColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetBackColor

The GetBackColor function returns the current background color for a
presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetBackColor (LONG ps)

    Remarks      This function returns the current background color associated
                 with the specified presentation space. The returned color is
                 specified as an RGB value.

    See Also     GetPS, SetBackColor, GetDrawColor, GetSysColor, RGB

    Example

                                  LONG BackColor
                                  LONG ps

                                  BackColor = GetBackColor (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.12. GetDrawColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetDrawColor

The GetDrawColor function returns the current drawing color for a presentation
space.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetDrawColor (LONG ps)

    Remarks      This function returns the current drawing color associated
                 with the specified presentation space. The returned color is
                 specified as an RGB value.

    See Also     GetPS, SetDrawColor, GetBackColor, GetSysColor, RGB

    Example

                                  LONG DrawColor
                                  LONG ps

                                  DrawColor = GetDrawColor (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.13. GetFillPattern ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetFillPattern

This function returns the current fill pattern for a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetFillPattern (LONG ps)

    Remarks      This function returns the current fill pattern associated with
                 the specified presentation space. The returned value may be
                 one of the following constants:

       Fill_Density1
       Fill_Density2
       Fill_Density3
       Fill_Density4
       Fill_Density5
       Fill_Density6
       Fill_Density7
       Fill_Density8
       Fill_Vertical
       Fill_Horizontal
       Fill_Diagonal1
       Fill_Diagonal2
       Fill_Diagonal3
       Fill_Diagonal4
       Fill_NoShade
       Fill_Solid
       Fill_HalfTone
       Fill_Hatch
       Fill_DiagonalHatch

    Example

                                  LONG FillPattern
                                  LONG ps

                                  FillPattern = GetFillPattern (ps)

    See Also     FillBox FillCircle FillEllipse GetPS SetFillPattern


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.14. GetImageSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetImageSize

The function returns the current size of an image.

    Syntax

                                  VOID GetImageSize (IMAGE img, LONG *cx, LONG *cy)

    Remarks      This function places the horizontal size of the image in the
                 variable represented by cx and the vertical size in cy.

    See Also     DrawImage LoadImage

    Example

                                  LONG ImageX, ImageY

                                  GetImageSize (AppIcon, ImageX, ImageY)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.15. GetLineType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetLineType

The GetLineType function returns the current line type for a presentation
space.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetLineType (LONG ps)

    Remarks      This function returns the current line type associated with
                 the specified presentation space. The returned value may be
                 one of the following constants:

       Line_Dot
       Line_ShortDash
       Line_DashDot
       Line_DoubleDot
       Line_LongDash
       Line_DashDoubleDot
       Line_Solid  (default)
       Line_Invisible

    See Also     GetPS, SetLineType, DrawLine, LineTo

    Example

                                  LONG LineType
                                  LONG ps

                                  LineType = GetLineType (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.16. GetPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetPS

The GetPS function retrieves the presentation space handle for the specified
window.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetPS (WINDOW win)

    Remarks      All drawing functions require a presentation space to draw
                 into.

                 If drawing needs to be done within a 'Paint' event, then the
                 presentation space handle is provided for you. However, if you
                 need to update a window when you are not inside a 'Paint'
                 event, you can use the GetPS function.

                 When you have finished with the presentation space handle, it
                 must be 'released' back to the window using the ReleasePS
                 function. Failing to do so will result in large amounts of
                 memory being consumed by the system graphics kernel (which
                 will cause the system to eventually run out of memory).

                 The GetPS and ReleasePS pair should both be called from within
                 the same event module. They have been designed to be used when
                 'quick' updates to a window need to be made (eg. updating the
                 display of a timer). Using this method, the update to the
                 window is only temporary.  If the window ever gets covered by
                 another window (invalidated), a resulting 'Paint' message will
                 re-paint over any changes made to the window.

    See Also     ReleasePS

    Example      The following example gets a window presentation space, draws
                 a filled circle in the window and then releases the
                 presentation space. Note that this circle may be overdrawn
                 when the next 'Paint' event occurs:

                                  VOID Frame1.Pushbutton1.Click ()
                                      LONG ps

                                      ps = GetPS(Frame1)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      FillCircle (ps, 10)
                                      ReleasePS(ps)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.17. GetSysColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetSysColor

The GetSysColor function returns the RGB color value for a specified system
color index.

    Syntax

                                  LONG GetSysColor (LONG index)

    Remarks      The system maintains an array of system colors for various
                 application/window components. Each window component color has
                 a predefined index as follows:

                 These system color index constants represent the colors that
                 may be changed via the system Scheme Pallete worklace object.

    See Also     SetSysColor, RGB

    Example

                                  LONG ps

                                  ps = GetPS
                                  SetDrawColor (ps, GetSysColor (SysClr_StaticText))
                                  SetBackColor (ps, GetSysColor (SysClr_DialogBackground))
                                  DrawText (ps, "Static Text")
                                  ReleasePS (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.18. LineTo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LineTo

The LineTo function draws a line from the current graphics position to the
specified X/Y coordinates.

    Syntax

                                  VOID LineTo (LONG ps, LONG x, LONG y)

    Remarks      The line is drawn using the current line color and line type.
                 The current graphics position is changed to the X/Y
                 coordinates specified for the end of the line after this call.

    See Also     MoveTo, GetPS, DrawLine, SetDrawColor, SetLineType

    Example      This example draws a box by using the LineTo function.

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      LineTo (ps, 50, 100)
                                      LineTo (ps, 100, 100)
                                      LineTo (ps, 100, 50)
                                      LineTo (ps, 50, 50)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.19. LoadImage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LoadImage

The LoadImage function loads an icon, pointer or bitmap resource file from disk
into memory.

    Syntax

                                  IMAGE LoadImage (STRING filename)

    Remarks      The returned IMAGE type can be used whereever an image is
                 expected.

    See Also     DrawImage

    Example      This example loads an icon file when the frame is created and
                 draws it at the origin of the frame window when a Paint event
                 occurs:

                                  IMAGE FrameIcon ; In 'Global Variables'

                                  VOID Frame1.Create ()
                                      FrameIcon = LoadImage ("c:\Guide\Res\Sat01.ico")
                                  end

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 0, 0)
                                      DrawImage (ps, FrameIcon)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.20. MoveTo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MoveTo

The MoveTo function moves the current graphics position to the specified
coordinates.

    Syntax

                                  VOID MoveTo (LONG ps, LONG x, LONG y)

    Remarks      No actual drawing takes place during this call.

                 The current graphics coordinates are used by other drawing
                 functions as a reference point to start drawing. The
                 coordinates are based on a logical graph coordinate system,
                 where the origin is considered the lower-left corner of a
                 window. Units are measured relative to this origin in standard
                 window units (pels).

    See Also     GetPS, LineTo, DrawLine, DrawBox, DrawCircle, DrawEllipse,
                 DrawImage

    Example      This example moves the graphics coordinates for the window and
                 then draws a circle around the point.

                                  VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      LineTo (ps, 50, 100)
                                      LineTo (ps, 100, 100)
                                      LineTo (ps, 100, 50)
                                      LineTo (ps, 50, 50)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.21. ReleasePS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ReleasePS

The ReleasePS function releases a presentation space handle previously
retrieved using GetPS.

    Syntax

                                  VOID ReleasePS (LONG ps)

    Remarks      The ReleasePS causes the memory used by the presentation space
                 (which can be very large) to be returned to the system and
                 made available for other windows to use.

    See Also     GetPS

    Example      The following example gets a window presentation space, draws
                 a filled circle in the window and then releases the
                 presentation space.

                                  VOID Frame1.Pushbutton1.Click ()
                                      LONG ps

                                      ps = GetPS(Frame1)
                                      SetBackColor(ps, RGB_Blue)
                                      SetDrawColor(ps, RGB_White)
                                      ClearPS(ps)
                                      MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                      FillCircle (ps, 10)
                                      ReleasePS(ps)
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.22. SetBackColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetBackColor

The SetBackColor function sets the current background color for a presentation
space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID SetBackColor (LONG ps, LONG rgb)

    Remarks      The background color is used by the ClearPS and DrawText
                 functions and is specified as an RGB value.

    See Also     GetPS, GetBackColor, SetDrawColor, RGB, GetSysColor, ClearPS,
                 DrawBox

    Example

                                  LONG ps

                                  ps = GetPS ()
                                  SetDrawColor (ps, RGB_Yellow)
                                  SetBackColor (ps, RGB_Blue)
                                  DrawText (ps, "Hello World")
                                  ReleasePS (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.23. SetDrawColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetDrawColor

The SetDrawColor function sets the current drawing color for a presentation
space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID SetDrawColor (LONG ps, LONG rgb)

    Remarks      The drawing color is used by the LineTo, DrawLine, DrawBox,
                 FillBox, DrawCircle, FilLCircle, DrawEllipse, FillEllipse and
                 DrawText functions.

    See Also     GetPS, GetDrawColor, SetBackColor, RGB, GetSysColor, LineTo,
                 DrawLine, DrawBox, FillBox, DrawCircle, FillCircle,
                 DrawEllipse, FillEllipse, DrawText.

    Example

                                  LONG ps

                                  ps = GetPS ()
                                  SetDrawColor (ps, RGB_Yellow)
                                  SetBackColor (ps, RGB_Blue)
                                  DrawText (ps, "Hello World")
                                  ReleasePS (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.24. SetFillPattern ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetFillPattern

This function sets the current fill pattern for a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  VOID SetFillPattern (LONG ps, LONG FillPattern)

    Remarks      The fill pattern specified is used for any future fills
                 including filled boxes, filled circles and filled ellipses.
                 The pre-defined fill patterns that are available are as
                 follows:

       Fill_Density1
       Fill_Density2
       Fill_Density3
       Fill_Density4
       Fill_Density5
       Fill_Density6
       Fill_Density7
       Fill_Density8
       Fill_Vertical
       Fill_Horizontal
       Fill_Diagonal1
       Fill_Diagonal2
       Fill_Diagonal3
       Fill_Diagonal4
       Fill_NoShade
       Fill_Solid
       Fill_HalfTone
       Fill_Hatch
       Fill_DiagonalHatch

    Refer to the list of fill pattern constants for examples of the various
    fill patterns.

    Example

                                  LONG ps

                                  ps = GetPS ()
                                  SetFillPattern (ps, Fill_Solid)
                                  MoveTo(ps, 50, 50)
                                  FillBox (ps, 100, 100, 0)
                                  ReleasePS (ps)

    See Also     FillBox, FillCircle, FillEllipse, GetPS, GetFillPattern.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.25. SetLineType ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetLineType

The SetLineType function sets the current line type for a presentation space.

    Syntax

                                  LONG SetLineType (LONG ps)

    Remarks      The line type specified is used for any future line drawing
                 including lines, boxes, circles, ellipses, etc. The available
                 pre-defined line types are as shown in the line type constants
                 section.

    See Also     GetPS, GetLineType, DrawLine, LineTo

    Example

                                  LONG ps

                                  ps = GetPS ()
                                  SetLineType (ps, Line_Solid)
                                  DrawLine (ps, 0, 0, 10, 10)
                                  ReleasePS (ps)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3.10.26. SetSysColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetSysColor

The SetSysColor function sets the RGB color value of a specified system color
index.

    Syntax

                                  VOID SetSysColor (LONG index, LONG rgb)

    Remarks      The system maintains an array of colors for a predefined set
                 of application/window components. Each window component color
                 has a predefined index as follows:

                 Updating a system color will cause the desktop to notify all
                 applications that the system colors have changed.

    See Also     GetSysColor, RGB

    Example

                                  SetSysColor (SysClr_StaticText, RGB_Blue)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. JOT Predefined Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Predefined Constants

JOT constants are categorised according to the following families:

    Γûá Limit Constants
    Γûá Message Constants
    Γûá Run Mode Constants
    Γûá Presentation Parameter Constants
    Γûá Color Constants
    Γûá System Color Constants
    Γûá Draw Flag Constants
    Γûá Fill Type Constants
    Γûá Line Type Constants
    Γûá Miscellaneous Constants


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.1. Limit Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Limit constants represent the upper and lower limits for integer data types:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName     ΓöéType  ΓöéValue       ΓöéDescription       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMinShort ΓöéSHORT Γöé-32768      ΓöéThe smallest valueΓöé
Γöé         Γöé      Γöé            Γöéa SHORT may have  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMaxShort ΓöéSHORT Γöé32767       ΓöéThe largest value Γöé
Γöé         Γöé      Γöé            Γöéa SHORT may have  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMinLong  ΓöéLONG  Γöé-2147483648 ΓöéThe smallest valueΓöé
Γöé         Γöé      Γöé            Γöéa LONG may have   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMaxLong  ΓöéLONG  Γöé2147483647  ΓöéThe largest value Γöé
Γöé         Γöé      Γöé            Γöéa LONG may have   Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.2. Message Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Message constants represent the button which was pressed to close a message
box:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName      ΓöéDescription                          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Ok     ΓöéThe OK button was used to close the  Γöé
Γöé          Γöémessage box                          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Cancel ΓöéThe Cancel button was used to close  Γöé
Γöé          Γöéthe message box                      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Abort  ΓöéThe Abort button was used to close   Γöé
Γöé          Γöéthe message box                      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Retry  ΓöéThe Retry button was used to close   Γöé
Γöé          Γöéthe message box                      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Ignore ΓöéThe Ignore button was used to close  Γöé
Γöé          Γöéthe message box                      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Yes    ΓöéThe Yes button was used to close the Γöé
Γöé          Γöémessage box                          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_No     ΓöéThe No button was used to close the  Γöé
Γöé          Γöémessage box                          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéMB_Enter  ΓöéThe Enter button was used to close   Γöé
Γöé          Γöéthe message box                      Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.3. Run Mode Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Run mode constants determine the mode of execution when executing a program
using RunProgram:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName          ΓöéDescription                     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSynchronous   ΓöéRun the program synchronously   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéAsynchronous  ΓöéRun the program asynchronously  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéBackground    ΓöéRun the program as a background Γöé
Γöé              Γöé(detached) process              Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.4. Presentation Parameter Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation parameter constants select the presentation parameter to be
modified or fetched:

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName                      ΓöéDescription           Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Foreground             ΓöéThe foreground color  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Background             ΓöéThe background color  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_HiliteForeground       ΓöéThe hilited foregroundΓöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_HiliteBackground       ΓöéThe hilited backgroundΓöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_DisabledForeground     ΓöéThe disabled          Γöé
Γöé                          Γöéforeground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_DisabledBackground     ΓöéThe disabled          Γöé
Γöé                          Γöébackground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Border                 ΓöéThe border color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Font                   ΓöéThe font name and sizeΓöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Active                 ΓöéThe active window     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle bar color       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Inactive               ΓöéThe inactive window   Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle bar color       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_ActiveTextForeground   ΓöéThe active window     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle text foreground Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_ActiveTextBackground   ΓöéThe active window     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle text background Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_InactiveTextForeground ΓöéThe inactive window   Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle text foreground Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_InactiveTextBackground ΓöéThe inactive window   Γöé
Γöé                          Γöétitle text background Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_Shadow                 ΓöéThe Shadow color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuForeground         ΓöéThe menu foreground   Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuBackground         ΓöéThe menu background   Γöé
Γöé                          Γöécolor                 Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuHiliteForeground   ΓöéThe menu hilite       Γöé
Γöé                          Γöéforeground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuHiliteBackground   ΓöéThe menu hilite       Γöé
Γöé                          Γöébackground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuDisabledForeground ΓöéThe disabled menu     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöéforeground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_MenuDisabledBackground ΓöéThe disabled menu     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöébackground color      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéPP_User                   ΓöéThe starting index forΓöé
Γöé                          Γöéuser presentation     Γöé
Γöé                          Γöéparameters            Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.5. Color Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName           ΓöéDescription  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_White      ΓöéWhite        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Yellow     ΓöéYellow       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Pink       ΓöéPink         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Red        ΓöéRed          Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Cyan       ΓöéCyan         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Green      ΓöéGreen        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Blue       ΓöéBlue         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Brown      ΓöéBrown        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_Black      ΓöéBlack        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_PaleGrey   ΓöéPale gray    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkGrey   ΓöéDark gray    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkPink   ΓöéDark pink    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkRed    ΓöéDark red     Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkCyan   ΓöéDark cyan    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkGreen  ΓöéDark green   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéRGB_DarkBlue   ΓöéDark blue    Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.6. System Color Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName                              ΓöéDescription Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_3DHighlightBright          ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöélight edges Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof button   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_3DHighlightDark            ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöédark edges  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof button   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ActiveBorder               ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéactive frameΓöé
Γöé                                  Γöéwindow      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéborder      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ActiveTitleBackground      ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéactive titleΓöé
Γöé                                  Γöébar         Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ActiveTitleText            ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéactive titleΓöé
Γöé                                  Γöébar text    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ActiveTitleTextBackground  ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéactive titleΓöé
Γöé                                  Γöébar text    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ApplicationWorkspace       ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéapplication Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéclient      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéwindow      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_DialogBackground           ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöédialog      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_DropShadow                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöédrop shadow Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof menus    Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_EntryField                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéentry fieldsΓöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_Frame                      ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéframe windowΓöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_HelpBackground             ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhelp        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_HelpHighlight              ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhighlighted Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéitems in    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhelp        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_HelpText                   ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöénormal help Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_IconText                   ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext of     Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéicons       Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_InactiveArea               ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéfield       Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackgrounds Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_InactiveBorder             ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéinactive    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéframe windowΓöé
Γöé                                  Γöéborder      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_InactiveTitleBackground    ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéinactive    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétitle bar   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_InactiveTitleText          ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéinactive    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétitle bar   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_InactiveTitleTextBackgroundΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéinactive    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétitle bar   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_MenuBackground             ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöémenu        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_MenuDisabledText           ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöédisabled    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöémenu text   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_MenuHighlightBackground    ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöémenu        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhighlight   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_MenuHighlightText          ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöémenu        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhighlight   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_MenuText                   ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöénormal menu Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext        Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_NotebookPageBackground     ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöénotebook    Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöépage        Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_OutputText                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext output Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéto a window Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_PushButtonBackground       ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöépush button Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_PushButtonDefaultBorder    ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöédefault     Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéborder of   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöépush buttonsΓöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ScreenBackground           ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof screen   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ScrollBarBackground        ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéscroll bar  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_SelectionBackground        ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof current  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéselection   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_SelectionForeground        ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéforeground  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof current  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéselection   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ShadowHighlightBackground  ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéof          Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhighlighted Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéshadow      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéobject      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ShadowHighlightText        ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéhighlighted Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéshadow      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéobject text Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_ShadowText                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöétext of     Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéshadow      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéobject      Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_StaticText                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéstatic text Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_TitleBottom                ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéline drawn  Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéunder title Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébar         Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_WindowBackground           ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéwindow      Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöébackground  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéSysClr_WindowText                 ΓöéColor for   Γöé
Γöé                                  Γöéwindow text Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.7. Draw Flag Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ΓöîΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö¼ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÉ
ΓöéName           ΓöéDescription               Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDrw_Normal     ΓöéDraw the image normally   Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDrw_Halftoned  ΓöéDraw the image halftoned  Γöé
Γö£ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö╝ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöñ
ΓöéDrw_Inverted   ΓöéDraw the image inverted   Γöé
ΓööΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓö┤ΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÇΓöÿ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.8. Fill Type Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Fill_Density1

    Fill_Density2

    Fill_Density3

    Fill_Density4

    Fill_Density5

    Fill_Density6

    Fill_Density7

    Fill_Density8

    Fill_Vertical

    Fill_Horizontal

    Fill_Diagonal1

    Fill_Diagonal2

    Fill_Diagonal3

    Fill_Diagonal4

    Fill_NoShade

    Fill_Solid

    Fill_HalfTone

    Fill_Hatch

    Fill_DiagonalHatch


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.9. Line Type Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

    Line_Dot

    Line_ShortDash

    Line_DashDot

    Line_DoubleDot

    Line_LongDash

    Line_DashDoubleDot

    Line_Solid

    Line_Invisible         (not drawn)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10. Miscellaneous Constants ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Miscellaneous Constants

This section describes the miscellaneous constants defined within the JOT
Language.

    Γûá Desktop       The desktop window

    Γûá False         A zero value

    Γûá Forever       A value which can be used to cause loops to loop
                    indefinitely

    Γûá Null          A Null string

    Γûá NullWindow    A Null Window

    Γûá Object        The system object window

    Γûá Pi            A value which approximates to Pi

    Γûá True          A value guaranteed never to be False


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.1. Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Desktop

The Desktop constant represents the desktop window.

 Type

                                  WINDOW

 Value           Value of current Desktop Window

 Remarks         The Desktop constant can be used wherever a normal window
                 expression is expected.

 See Also        Object

 Example

                                  Frame1.Parent = Object   ;Make frame an object window
                                  Frame1.Parent = Desktop   ;Make frame normal again


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.2. False ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

False

The False constant represents a zero value.

 Type            SHORT

 Value           0

 Remarks         False can be used wherever a boolean expression is expected
                 instead of a zero value to make the code more readable.

 See Also        True.

 Example         The example uses the False constant to set the value of a
                 pushbutton's enabled properly.

                                  Frame1.PushButton1.Enabled = False


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.3. Forever ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Forever

The Forever constant represents a zero-value which can be used within loops
that are required to loop indefinitely.

 Type            SHORT

 Value           1

 Remarks         C++ compilers normally display a warning for while(1) type
                 statements, because the 1 is a non-varying constant. The
                 Forever constant is useful in this case since it is
                 implemented as a function returning a non-zero value.

 See Also        True, False

 Example

                                  while Forever
                                      ;Calculate the next digit of PI
                                  end


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.4. Null ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Null

The Null constant represents a Null string.

 Type

                                  STRING

 Value           Zero-length string.

 Remarks         The Null constant can be used wherever a normal string
                 expression is expected and is returned by some functions if an
                 error condition arises or memory for the returned string could
                 not be allocated.

 See Also

 Example         This example sets the global STRING variable aStr to be Null.
                 In a later action module, the value of aStr is checked and, if
                 Null, aStr is assigned the value of the Frame title.

                                  ; Set in Global Variables
                                  STRING aStr = Null
                                      ┬╖
                                      ┬╖
                                      ┬╖
                                  ; Later Action Module
                                  if aStr = Null
                                      then
                                      aStr = Frame1.Text
                                      endif


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.5. NullWindow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NullWindow

The NullWindow constant is used to indicate that no window is being specified
in an expression.

 Type

                                  WINDOW

 Value           0.

 Remarks         The NullWindow constant can be used wherever a normal WINDOW
                 expression is expected and can be used to indicate that no
                 window is to be specified.

 See Also        Desktop, Object

 Example

                                  ;Frame has no owner window
                                  Frame1.Owner = NullWindow


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.6. Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object

The Object constant represents the system object window.

 Type

                                  WINDOW

 Value           Value of current system object window.

 Remarks         The Object constant can be used wherever a normal window
                 expression is expected. Any windows which are directly or
                 indirectly children of the system object window are considered
                 object windows themselves. Object windows are never displayed.

 See Also        Desktop

 Example

                                  Frame1.Parent = Object   ;Make frame an object window
                                  Frame1.Parent = Desktop   ;Make frame normal again


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.7. Pi ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pi

To Be Done

 Type            To Be Done

 Value           To Be Done

 Remarks         To Be Done

 See Also        To Be Done

 Example         To Be Done


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4.10.8. True ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

True

The True constant represents a value guaranteed never to be False.

 Type            SHORT

 Value           1.

 Remarks         The True constant can be used wherever a boolean expression is
                 expected instead of a non-zero value to make the code more
                 readable.

 See Also        False.

 Example         The example uses the True constant to set the value of a
                 pushbutton's enabled proprty.

                                  Frame1.PushButton1.Enabled = True


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Standard Controls Overview ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This section describes the Standard Controls. These are the building blocks
used to construct an application.

It contains the following sections:

    Γûá Standard Controls
    Γûá Methods
    Γûá Properties
    Γûá Events


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Standard Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Standard Controls

This section describes the Standard Controls and Window types supported by the
JOT Language.

    Γûá Button Controls
    Γûá Combo Box
    Γûá Custom
    Γûá Dialog Window
    Γûá Entry Field
    Γûá Frame Window
    Γûá List Box
    Γûá Menu Bar
    Γûá Menu Item
    Γûá Multiple-Line Entry Field
    Γûá Scroll Bars
    Γûá Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1. Button Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button Controls

The Button controls, are implemented as a single control with multiple Styles
to support the different Types of buttons available.

They share a common Details dialog to set their styles and properties.

    Γûá Check Box
    Γûá Push Button
    Γûá Radio Button
    Γûá Three-State Check Box
    Γûá User Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1.1. Check Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Check Box

    Overview A Check Box control displays a small square with a character
            string to the right. A small black tick appears inside the square
            when it is checked, by clicking it with the mouse or pressing the
            spacebar when the control is active.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation A Check Box signals that it has changed by the Click event.
            If an action module is written for this event, the programmer may
            use the Checked property to obtain the check state of the button.
            If the check box control is an automatic check box, it will toggle
            its state automatically when it is selected; otherwise, it is
            necessary to toggle its state programmatically by responding to the
            Click. event.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Click, DblClick

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Button Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control A Check box is generally used to denote a Yes/No or
            Enabled/Disabled type option to the user.  The Check box control
            can be used in a group, but behaves independently of other
            controls, unlike the Radio button.

    See Also Push Button, Radio Button, Three-State Checkbox, User Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1.2. Push button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Push button

    Overview A Push button control is a simple button control containing a text
            string or a single image.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation When the user pushes a Push button, using the mouse or the
            spacebar, a Click event is generated.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Click, DblClick

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Button Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control The Push button control is used to provide the user with
            a means of initiating an action, invoking a command, or dismissing
            a dialog. For example, a Dialog normally has three standard buttons
            - Ok, Cancel, and Help.

    See Also Check Box, Radio Button, Three-State Checkbox, User Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1.3. Radio Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Radio Button

    Overview The Radio Button control is similar to a Check Box, except that it
            displays a circular button with text to its right. It is normally
            used in groups in which only one button at a time is checked.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation When a Radio Button is selected, a Click event is generated
            for the button. If the Check Box control is an automatic Check Box,
            it will toggle its state automatically when it is selected;
            otherwise, it is necessary to toggle its state programmatically by
            responding to the Click event.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Click, DblClick

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Button Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control Radio buttons are always used in groups of two or more,
            and are used to provide a set of mutually exclusive options. The
            first Radio button in a group is normally given the Start of Group
            style, so that the user can tab to the group and use the cursor
            keys to cycle through the choices.

    See Also Check Box, Three-State Checkbox, User Button, Push Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1.4. Three-State Check Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Three-State Check Box

    Overview A Three-State Check Box is identical to a Check Box control except
            that it can be half-toned as well as being checked or unchecked.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The Three-State Check Box signals that it has changed by the
            Click event.  If an action module is written for this event, the
            programmer may use the Checked property to obtain the check state
            of the button. If the check box control is an automatic check box,
            it will toggle its state automatically when it is selected;
            otherwise, it is necessary to toggle its state programmatically by
            responding to the Click event.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Click, DblClick

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Button Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control A Three-state Check box is used in similar situations to
            the normal Check box, except that the third state might be used to
            specify that they are all selected. An example can be seen in the
            OS/2 Seek and Scan Files program, supplied in the Productivity
            folder.  It uses a series of Check boxes to allow the user to
            specify which drives are to be searched for the files, and the
            third state is used to denote that all fixed drives will be
            searched.

    See Also Push Button, Radio Button, User Button, Check Box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.1.5. User Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

User Button

    Overview Toolbar Icon

            The User Button control is an application-defined button.

    Implementation The User Button receives a Paint notification when it is
            required to be redrawn. At this point the application may draw the
            button as appropriate to its current state.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Click, DblClick

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Button Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control

    See Also Push Button, Radio Button, Three-State Check Box, Check Box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.2. Combo Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Combo Box

    Overview The Combo Box control consists of an entry field control and a
            list box control merged into a single control. The list is
            displayed below the entry field and offset slightly to the right.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation A Combo Box control signals changes to its contents using
            the Change event (if the entry field changes), the Select event (if
            an entry in the listbox is highlighted) and the Enter event (if the
            user selects an entry in the listbox). Information on items in the
            combobox may be obtained using the Count, TopIndex and Selection
            properties.

    Properties Count, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Selection,
            Text, TopIndex, Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Change, Enter, Error, HScroll, Select, ShowList, VScroll

    Methods AppendItem, ClearItems, DeleteItem, DeselectItem, GetItemHandle,
            GetItemText, GiveFocus, InsertItem, NextSelection, SelectItem,
            SetItemHandle, SetItemText

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Combo Box
            Details dialog.

    Using the Control A Combo box control might be used to display a dynamic
            list of options, which may or may not be displayed all at once, and
            which may or may not be editable by the user at runtime.  The
            different types of Combo boxes allow for these different
            situations.  An example of using a Combo box is in the standard
            File Open dialog, where the drives are displayed in a Drop-down
            Combo box.

    See Also List Box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.3. Custom Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Custom Control

    Overview The Custom control provides a way of using non-standard controls
            contained in external DLLs.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The preferred method of using external controls is by
            supplying them in Guidelines custom extensions, or .GUE files. In
            this way, all of the features of the control may be used from
            within Guidelines.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The basic settings for this control are entered using the Custom
            Control Details dialog.

    Using the Control To be completed ...

    See Also User Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.4. Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dialog

    Overview The Dialog window is an alternative to the Frame window for
            providing one of the basic building blocks of a GUI application - a
            window on which to place additional controls. Every GUI application
            must have at least one Frame or Dialog window.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation A Dialog or Frame window is the parent of the set of
            controls which it contains. As such, all references to controls
            inJOTmust be made through the Dialog or Frame window they are
            contained within, eg:

                        Dialog11.PushButton1.ID

            Dialog and Frame windows provide Load, Process, Invoke and Dismiss
            methods to allow the programmer control over when the windows are
            displayed.

            During processing, Dialogs and Frames use the Create, event to
            allow the programmer to initialize controls prior to the display of
            the window, and the Destroy event to allow the programmer to
            perform termination actions when the window is destroyed.

    Properties Enabled, Height, Icon, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Activate, Close, Create, Deactivate, Destroy, Hide, Show, Size,
            ThreadEnded

    Methods Activate, Dismiss, Invoke, Load, Maximize, Minimize, Process,
            Restore, Unload

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Frame Window
            Details dialog.

    Using the Control A Dialog is normally invoked from the main window to
            specify settings or options to be used in the program.  The
            implementation of Dialogs and Frames are highly
            application-dependent. See the discussion on Dialog and Frame
            windows in Using Guidelines for further details.

    See Also Frame


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.5. Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Entry Field

    Overview An Entry Field control is a rectangular window that displays a
            single line of text for editing by the user.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The Entry Field control signals when its contents have
            changed by using the Change event. The programmer can set and
            retrieve the contents of the field using the Text property.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MaxLength, MaxSel, MinSel, MousePtr, Owner,
            Parent, Text, Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Change, Error, GainFocus, HScroll, LoseFocus Overflow

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Entry Field
            Details dialog.

    Using the Control The Entry Field control is used to provide the user with
            a means of entering a single line of text. The text might represent
            a name or field in a database, or a file name. When the application
            design requires the facility to display and enter multiple lines of
            text, the MLE control is supplied.

    See Also Multiple-Line Entry Field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.6. Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Frame

    Overview The Frame window provides one of the basic building blocks of a
            GUI application - a window on which to place additional controls.
            Every GUI application must have at least one Frame or Dialog
            window.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation A Frame or Dialog window is the parent of the set of
            controls which it contains. As such, all references to controls
            inJOTmust be made through the Frame or Dialog window they are
            contained within, eg:

                        Frame1.PushButton1.ID

            Frame and Dialog windows provide Load, Process, Invoke and Dismiss
            methods to allow the programmer control over when the windows are
            displayed.

            During processing, Dialogs and Frames use the Create, event to
            allow the programmer to initialize controls prior to the display of
            the window, and the Destroy event to allow the programmer to
            perform termination actions when the window is destroyed.

    Properties Enabled, Height, Icon, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Activate, Close, Create, Deactivate, Destroy, Hide, Show, Size,
            ThreadEnded

    Methods Activate, Dismiss, Invoke, GetClientRect, Load, Maximize, Minimize,
            Process, Restore, Unload

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Frame Window
            Details dialog.

    Using the Control A Frame window is normally the Primary window used in the
            application, and serves as the workspace for the application.  It
            normally has a menu from which actions are performed and Dialogs
            invoked, and the client area is used as the area in which the user
            works.  The implementation of Dialogs and Frames are highly
            application-dependent. See the discussion on Dialog and Frame
            windows in Using Guidelines.

    See Also Dialog


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.7. List Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

List Box

    Overview A List Box control is a window containing a list of items. Each
            item in the list box consists of a string of text and an optional
            handle. The string of text is displayed in the list box window,
            while the handle may be used to store additional information about
            the list box item.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation A List Box control signals changes to its contents using the
            Select event (if an entry in the listbox is highlighted) and the
            Enter event (if the user selects an entry in the listbox).
            Information on items in the List Box may be obtained using the
            Count, TopIndex and Selection properties.

    Properties Count, Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Selection,
            Text, TopIndex, Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Enter, GainFocus, LoseFocus, Select, VScroll

    Methods AppendItem, ClearItems, DeleteItem, DeselectItem, GetItemHandle,
            GetItemText, GiveFocus, InsertItem, NextSelection, SelectItem,
            SetItemHandle, SetItemText

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the List Box
            Details dialog.

    Using the Control A List box is used to display a list of items, from which
            the user selects items and possibly invokes some action to be
            performed upon the selected items.  In addition, double-clicking on
            the item might invoke a dialog with further details on the specific
            item.  This is achieved by responding to the Enter event.  To
            perform some action upon the selected items, use a loop and iterate
            through the selections using .Selection and .NextSelection.  The
            optional item handle might be used to store a reference to each
            item which is invisible to the user but which allows the developer
            to associate each item with a reference at runtime, such as a
            record number from a database.

    See Also Combo Box


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.8. Menu Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Bar

    Overview The Menu Bar control is the window displaying the top-level menu
            of the application.

    Toolbar Icon None

    Implementation The Menu Bar properties may be used to change the appearance
            and behaviour of the Menu Bar.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Menu Bar
            Details dialog. This dialog is used to enter or change the details
            of the actual Menu bar.

    Using the Control Refer to Using Guidelines for details on using the menus
            in an application.

    See Also Menu Item


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.9. Menu Item ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item

    Overview A Menu Item control represents the text displayed in a Menu Bar.

    Toolbar Icon None

    Implementation The Menu Item control initiates a Click event when it is
            selected. Applications respond to these events to perform the tasks
            associated with the particular menu item.

    Properties Checked, Enabled, MousePtr, Text, Update, Visible

    Events  Click

    Methods None.

    Settings The Menu Details dialog is used to enter or change the details of
            a Menu Item on a menu bar.

    Using the Control Refer to Using Guidelines for details on using menus in
            an application.

    See Also Menu Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.10. Multiple-Line Entry Field ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Multi-Line Entry Field

    Overview A Multiple-Line Entry Field control is a rectangular window which
            displays multiple lines of text for editing by the user.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The Multiple-Line Entry Field control notifies the
            application that its contents have been edited by using the Change
            event. The application sets the contents of the control using the
            Text property.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MaxLength, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text,
            Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  Change, Error, GainFocus, HScroll, LoseFocus, VScroll

    Methods GiveFocus

    Settings The Multiple Line Entry Field Details dialog allows you to set the
            styles of the multiple line entry (MLE) field control.

    Using the Control MLE controls are extremely useful in that the allow the
            user to edit an arbitrary length of text, while also providing
            clipboard support via the CUA keys (eg. Shift+Ins pastes the
            contents of the clipboard at the cursor position, etc).  They might
            be used as an interface to a database memo field, or as
            non-editable text to display error information.

    See Also Entry Field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.11. Scroll Bar Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button Controls

Scroll bars are used to indicate to the user that additional information is
available outside the displayed area. The following variants are available:

    Γûá Horizontal Scroll Bar
    Γûá Vertical Scroll Bar

 They share a common Scroll Bar Details dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.11.1. Horizontal Scroll Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Horizontal Scroll Bar

 Overview A Horizontal Scroll Bar control is used to indicate that additional
         information may be displayed in a window by moving the window contents
         to the left or the right.

 Toolbar Icon

 Implementation The Horizontal Scroll Bar indicates that it has been scrolled
         using the LineLeft and LineRight LineRight events for small movements
         or the PageLeft and PageRight events for large movements.

         The Track event is generated while the user holds the mouse cursor on
         the scrollbar slider and moves it. When the mouse button is released,
         the EndScroll event allows the programmer to calculate the new
         position for the window contents.

         The range of the Scroll Bar may be set programmatically using the Min
         and Max properties. The current position of the slider may be set
         using the Pos, property.

 Properties Enabled, Height, ID, Max, Min, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Pos, Text,
         Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

 Events  Change, EndScroll, LineLeft, LineRight, PageLeft, PageRight, Track

 Methods GiveFocus

 Settings The Scroll Bar Details dialog allows you to set the styles of the
         scroll bar control.

 Using the Control Scrollbars are normally attached to a frame window, and are
         used when there is more information to be displayed than can fit in
         the window. They can be used as standalone controls, in an
         application-specific sense, in similar situations to Slider controls.

 See Also Vertical Scroll Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.11.2. Vertical Scroll Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Vertical Scroll Bar

 Overview A Vertical Scroll Bar control is used to indicate that additional
         information may be displayed in a window by moving the window contents
         up or down.

 Toolbar Icon

 Implementation The Vertical Scroll Bar indicates that it has been scrolled
         using the LineUp and LineDown events for small movements or the PageUp
         and PageDown, events for large movements.

         The Track event is generated while the user holds the mouse cursor on
         the scrollbar slider and moves it up or down. When the mouse button is
         released, the EndScroll event allows the programmer to calculate the
         new position for the window contents.

         The range of the Scroll Bar may be set programmatically using the Min
         and Max properties. The current position of the slider may be set
         using the Pos property.

 Properties Enabled, Height, ID, Max, Min, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Pos, Text,
         Update, Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

 Events  Change, EndScroll, LineDown, LineUp, PageDown, PageUp, Track

 Methods GiveFocus

 Settings Scroll Bar Details dialog allows you to set the styles of the scroll
         bar control.

 Using the Control Scrollbars are normally attached to a frame window, and are
         used when there is more information to be displayed than can fit in
         the window. They can be used as standalone controls, in an
         application-specific sense, in similar situations to Slider controls.

 See Also Horizontal Scroll Bar


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12. Static Controls ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static Controls

The following controls make up the Static Controls.  A Static control does not
interact with the user, but simply acts as a visual element in an application.

All the OS/2 Static controls are actually the one control, with different
styles to determine the type of Static.  The following types are available:

    Γûá Bitmap
    Γûá Group Box
    Γûá Icon
    Γûá Rectangle
    Γûá Static Text
    Γûá System Icon
    The Static controls share a common Details dialog which allows you to enter
    and change the details of a Static control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.1. Bitmap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Bitmap

    Overview The Bitmap control is a static control containing a bitmap image.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The bitmap image displayed in the control is selected from
            the bitmap resources allocated to the application.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control A bitmap control can be used to dynamically display
            images within an application.  They can be used to display logos,
            banners, and images can even be loaded and displayed at runtime
            (see the LoadImage function).

    See Also Static Controls LoadImage


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.2. Group Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Group Box

    Overview A Group Box control is a static control consisting of a box with
            an optional text string in its upper left corner.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation Group box controls are used to collect a group of controls
            with similar purpose into a single unit.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control Use the Group box control to contain other controls such
            as Check boxes and Radio buttons.

    See Also Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.3. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Icon

    Overview The Icon control is a static control containing an icon image.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The icon image displayed in the control is selected from the
            icon resources allocated to the application.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control Icons are generally used in addition to text to enhance
            the appearance of dialogs, or to pictorially represent an action or
            setting.

    See Also Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.4. Rectangle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Rectangle

    Overview A Rectangle control is a rectangular window filled with the
            background colour, the foreground colour or a halftone colour.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The Rectangle control is a static control and has no unique
            properties or events. The standard properties may be used to change
            its appearance or position on the window.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control A Rectangle might be used instead of a Group box, and
            could be used either to create simple diagrams, or to act as a
            separator in a dialog between other controls.

    See Also Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.5. Static Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static Text

    Overview The Static Text control is a rectangular window containing
            formatted text.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The Static Text control is a static control and has no
            unique properties or events. The standard properties may be used to
            change its appearance or position on the window.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control Static Text is one of the most commonly used static
            controls, and is primarily used to label other controls.  If the
            text contains a mnemonic key and appears directly before a control
            in the Group/Tab Order, pressing Alt and the mnemonic will move the
            focus to the following control.

    See Also Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1.12.6. System Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

System Icon

    Overview The System Icon control is a static control containing a system
            icon image.

    Toolbar Icon

    Implementation The icon image displayed in the control is selected from the
            system icon resources available to the application.

    Properties Enabled, Height, ID, MousePtr, Owner, Parent, Text, Update,
            Visible, Width, XPos, YPos

    Events  None.

    Methods None.

    Settings The settings for this control are entered using the Static Details
            dialog.

    Using the Control A System Icon can be used in exactly the same manner as a
            normal Icon, except that it is restricted to displaying the icons
            provided by the system.

    See Also Static Controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Methods Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Methods Reference

This section describes the Methods provided by the Guidelines Controls.

    Γûá Activate
    Γûá AppendItem
    Γûá ClearItems
    Γûá DeleteItem
    Γûá DeselectItem
    Γûá Dismiss
    Γûá GetClientRect
    Γûá GetColor
    Γûá GetFont
    Γûá GetItemHandle
    Γûá GetItemText
    Γûá GiveFocus
    Γûá InsertItem
    Γûá Invoke
    Γûá Load
    Γûá Maximize
    Γûá Minimize
    Γûá NextSelection
    Γûá Process
    Γûá Restore
    Γûá SelectItem
    Γûá SetColor
    Γûá SetFont
    Γûá SetItemHandle
    Γûá SetItemText
    Γûá Unload


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.1. Activate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Activate

This method makes the specified frame/ dialog window the currently active
window.

    Applies To Frame, Dialog

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Activate ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks Only top-level windows can be activated. In order to make a window
            control the active window, it is necessary to activate its parent
            frame/ dialog window, then use GiveFocus to move the focus to that
            control.

    Example

                        Frame1.Activate ()

                        Frame1.Control1.GiveFocus ()

    See Also GiveFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.2. AppendItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AppendItem

This method appends a text item into a list box

    Applies To Combo Box,  List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.AppendItem ( STRING Item )

    Parameters

       Item      Text string which is the text that will appear in the list.

    Return Value The index of the appended list item

    Remarks The AppendItem method places Item at the end of a combo box or list
            box. The index is zero-based, ie. the first item has an index of 0,
            the second is 1, etc.

    Example The example uses AppendItem to add 10 items to the end of a list
            box.

                        For i = 1 to 10
                            Frame1.Listbox1.AppendItem("Item " + Str(i))
                        endfor

    See Also ClearItems, DeleteItem, InsertItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.3. ClearItems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ClearItems

This method is used to delete all items from a combo box or a list box.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.ClearItems ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The ClearItems method is more efficient than using the DeleteItem
            method to remove items from the list box and should be used where
            possible.

    Example The example uses the ClearItems method to delete all of the items
            from a Combo Box.

                        Frame1.Combobox1.ClearItems()

    See Also AppendItem, DeleteItem, InsertItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.4. DeleteItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DeleteItem

This method deletes an item from a combo box or list box control.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.DeleteItem ( SHORT Index )

    Parameters

       Index     Value representing the position in the list of the item to
                 delete. The first element in a list is represented by a value
                 of 0.

    Return Value None

    Remarks Items to be deleted are specified using a zero-based index, ie. 0
            for the first entry, 1 for the second and so on. If the index
            parameter used is invalid (i.e. does not correspond to an entry in
            the list), no entry is deleted. If it is desired to delete all of
            the items from the list, it is preferable to use the ClearItems
            method (rather than repeated calls to the DeleteItem) method since
            it is more efficient.

    Example The example uses DeleteItem to delete the currently selected item
            in a list box.

                        Frame1.Listbox1.DeleteItem(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection)

    See Also AppendItem, ClearItems, InsertItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.5. DeselectItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DeselectItem

This method deselects the specified item in a list box or combo box.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.DeselectItem ( SHORT Index )

    Parameters

       Index     Value representing the position of the item in the list to
                 deselect.

    Return Value None

    Remarks Like other methods which act on lists, the list index is
            zero-based.

    Example The example uses the DeselectItem method to deselect the currently
            selected item in a list box.

                        Frame1.Listbox1.DeselectItem(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection)

    See Also SelectItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.6. Dismiss ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Dismiss

This method signals to the system to end processing for the window.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Dismiss (SHORT result)

    Parameters

       result    Result code to return to calling method.

    Return Value None

    Remarks If a previous Process or Invoke method was called for this window,
            then control will return to the calling method. The result
            parameter is returned to the calling Process or Invoke. The window
            will be hidden before returning. If the window is being used in a
            non-modal context, Dismiss merely hides the window. It can be shown
            again by setting its Visible property to TRUE

    Example This example shows the typical use of Dismiss in the Action Module
            for an Ok Push Button on a Data Entry Dialog Box.

                        VOID ClientEntryDlg.OkButton.Click ()
                            if CheckClientData () then
                                SaveClientData ()
                                Dialog1.Dismiss (True)
                            endif
                        end

    See Also Invoke, Load, Process, Unload, Visible


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.7. GetClientRect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetClientRect

This method is used to query the size of the frame's client area.  The client
area is the total area taken up by the window excluding the frame itself, the
menu bar and the title bar.

    Applies To Frame window

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.GetClientRect (LONG x, LONG y,
                                                     LONG cx, LONG cy)

    Parameters

       x         Distance from the bottom of the screen to the bottom of the
                 client area

       y         Distance from the left of the screen to the left of the client
                 area

       cx        Width of the client area

       cy        Height of the client area

    Return Value None

    Remarks All measurements are in window co-ordinates, or pixels. This method
            is mainly used when drawing into the client area.  The frame's
            height and width cannot be used, since they include the size of the
            frame controls (menubar, titlebar, etc).

    Example This example queries the client area's size to draw a picture of a
            face (a 32x32 bitmap) in the exact center.

                            GetClientRect (x, y, cx, cy)
                            MoveTo (ps, (x/2)-16, (y/2)-16)
                            DrawImage (ps, Face, Drw_Normal)

    See Also Height, Width


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.8. GetColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetColor

This method returns the specified presentation parameter color of a window.

    Applies To All Windows

    Syntax

                        LONG <Window>.GetColor ( LONG presparm )

    Parameters

       presparm  index of presentation parameter to find.

    Return Value The current color for the supplied presentation parameter.

    Remarks The GetColor method returns a predefined color or a color
            constructed from the RGB. If the specified presentation parameter
            has not been set, the value -1 is returned. See SetColor for a
            complete list of the available presentation parameter IDs.

    Example

                        LONG aColor

                        ; Get the current foreground color for our frame window
                        aColor = Frame1.GetColor( PP_Foreground )

    See Also GetFont, SetColor, SetFont, RGB


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.9. GetFont ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetFont

This method returns the current font of a window.

    Applies To All Windows

    Syntax

                        STRING <Window>.GetFont ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value The string value of the current font.

    Remarks The GetFont method returns a string containing the name of the
            current presentation parameter font associated with a window, or
            Null if no font has been previously set. The font is returned in
            the following :

                        size.facename.options

       size      the point size of the font, eg. 12

       facename  the font name, eg. Helvetica

       options   any combination of: outline, underscore, strikeout

    Example

                        STRING aFont

                        ; Get the current font for our frame window
                        aFont = Frame1.GetFont()

    See Also GetColor, SetColor, SetFont


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.10. GetItemHandle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetItemHandle

This method is used to retrieve the optional handle (LONG value) which may be
associated with each entry of a combo box or list box.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        LONG <Window>.GetItemHandle ( SHORT Index )

    Parameters

       Index     Value representing the position of the item in the list to
                 obtain the handle of.

    Return Value The handle value assigned to the item in the list identified
            by Index.

    Remarks Each item in a combo box or list box may be assigned a handle (of
            type LONG) which is used to store extra information not readily
            displayable in the list box. The GetItemHandle method returns this
            handle, if one has been assigned; otherwise, it returns 0.

    Example The example uses GetItemHandle to get the handle value of the
            current selection of the list box, and places it in h.

                        LONG h

                            h =  Frame1.Listbox1.GetItemHandle(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection)

    See Also SetItemHandle


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.11. GetItemText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GetItemText

This method is used to retrieve the text of the item at the specified index in
the list box or combo box.

    Applies To Combo Box  List Box

    Syntax

                        STRING <Window>.GetItemText ( SHORT Index )

    Parameters

       Index     Position of the desired item in the list

    Return Value The text string of the item in the list identified by Index.

    Remarks The index parameter is, as with other list box methods, zero-based.

    Example The example uses GetItemText to retrieve the text value of the
            current selection in a list box, and places it in string s.

                        STRING s

                            s = Frame1.Listbox1.GetItemText(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection)

    See Also SetItemText


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.12. GiveFocus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GiveFocus

The GiveFocus method moves the current input focus to the specified window.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.GiveFocus ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks Calling this method initiates a LoseFocus event to the window which
            previously had the input focus followed by a GainFocus event to the
            window receiving the focus. Only one window at a time may have the
            input focus. Only window controls can be given the focus. To make a
            parent frame/dialog window the active window, use the Activate
            method.

    Example

                        Frame1.Activate ()
                        Frame1.Control1.GiveFocus ()

    See Also Activate, LoseFocus, GainFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.13. InsertItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

InsertItem

The InsertItem method is used to insert strings into a list box or combo box.

    Applies To Combo Box List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.InsertItem (SHORT Index, STRING Item)

    Parameters

       Index     Value representing the position in the list where the new item
                 is to be inserted. Alternatively, the following values can be
                 used in place of explicit item placement values:

                 -1   Insert at end (equivalent to AppendItem) -2   Sorted in
                 ascending order. -3   Sorted in descending order.

       Item      A string value representing the text that will be placed in
                 the item in the list after insertion.

    Return Value The index of the position of insertion of the new item.

    Remarks The first element in a list is represented by a value of 0.

    Example The example uses InsertItem to insert a new entry into a list box,
            sorting the entries in ascending order.

                        i = Frame1.Listbox1.InsertItem("A new Item", -2)

    See Also AppendItem, ClearItems, DeleteItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.14. Invoke ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Invoke

The Invoke method loads, processes and finally destroys a frame or dialog
window.

    Applies To Frame  Dialog

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Invoke (WINDOW owner)

    Parameters

       owner     The window which will become the owner of the loaded window,
                 or NullWindow if no owner is required.

    Return Value Value passed to the Dismiss method.

    Remarks This method causes the specified window to be loaded, processed as
            a modal window, and finally destroyed. It is useful for displaying
            popup dialogs which need to be modal to the rest of the
            application. If an owner window is specified, the loaded window
            becomes modal to the owner and any other window which belongs to
            the same owner-chain. Only top-level windows should be used with
            the Invoke method.

    Example

                        SHORT result

                        result = Dialog1.Invoke (Frame1)

                        ;The above code is equivalent to the following:

                        Dialog1.Load (Frame1)
                        result = Dialog1.Process ()
                        Dialog1.Unload ()

    See Also Dismiss, Load, Process, Unload


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.15. Load ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Load

The Load method loads the specified top-level frame/dialog window.

    Applies To Frame  Dialog

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Load (WINDOW owner)

    Parameters

       owner     The window which will become the owner of the loaded window,
                 or NullWindow if no owner is required.

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Load method causes the specified window and all of its control
            windows to be created (signalling the 'Create' event). The window
            is loaded from a template stored within the resources associated
            with the application. If an owner window is specified, the loaded
            window becomes modal to the owner and any other window which
            belongs to the same owner-chain. Only top-level windows should be
            used with the Load method.

    Example This example loads in a dialog window, calls the Process method and
            finally destroys the dialog when the Process method finishes. These
            three statements are equivalent to the Invoke method.

                        Dialog1.Load (Frame1)     ;Create the dialog window.
                        Dialog1.Process ()        ;Wait until Dismiss called.
                        Dialog1.Unload ()         ;Destroy the dialog window.

    See Also Dismiss, Invoke, Process, Unload


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.16. Maximize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Maximize

The Maximize method is used to maximize a frame or dialog window to its full
size.

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Maximize ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Restore method should be used to restore the window to its
            original size and position.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.ZoomButton.Click ()
                            Frame1.Maximize()
                        end

    See Also Minimize, Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.17. Minimize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Minimize

The Minimize method is used to miminize a frame or dialog window to icon size.

    Applies To Frame  Dialog

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Minimize ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks As with the Maximize method, the Restore method should be used to
            return the window to its original size and position.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.HideButton.Click ()
                            Frame1.Minimize()
                        end

    See Also Maximize, Restore


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.18. NextSelection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

NextSelection

The NextSelection method returns the index of the next selected item.

    Applies To Combo Box  List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.NextSelection (SHORT Start)

    Parameters

       Start     Value representing the start position in the list to search
                 for the next selected item.

    Return Value The index of the next selection in the list, -1 if no
            selection is found.

    Remarks The NextSelection method is used to obtain the next selected item
            in a list that is defined with Multiple Selection, after the index
            identified by Start.  A return value of -1 indicates that no more
            selected items could be found.

    Example The example uses NextSelection to iterate through the selected
            items in the list and delete them.

                        ; get the first one
                            index = MainFrame.NameList.Selection

                            ; go thru all the selected items
                            while index  -1
                                ; delete it
                                MainFrame.NameList.DeleteItem( index )
                                ; get the next selection
                                index = MainFrame.NameList.Selection
                            end

    See Also Selection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.19. Process ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Process

The Process method processes a previously loaded frame/dialog template as a
modal window.

    Applies To Frame  Dialog

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Process ()

    Parameters None.

    Return Value Value passed to the Dismiss method.

    Remarks The Process method does not return until the Dismiss method is
            called for this window. The value passed as the parameter for the
            Dismiss method becomes the return code for this method. The Process
            method will also show the window (if previously hidden) and
            activate it before allowing user input.

    Example This example loads in a dialog window, calls the Process method and
            finally destroys the dialog when the Process method finishes. These
            three statements are equivalent to the Invoke method.

                        Dialog1.Load (Frame1)   ;Create the dialog window.
                        Dialog1.Process ()      ;Wait until Dismiss called.
                        Dialog1.Unload ()       ;Destroy the dialog window

    See Also Dismiss, Invoke, Load, Unload


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.20. Restore ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Restore

The Restore method is used to restore the size of a frame or dialog window from
either a maximized or minimized state to its original size.

    Applies To Frame  Dialog

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Restore ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks Invoking the Restore method is the equivalent of selecting Restore
            from the window's System menu.

    Example

                        Frame1.Restore ()    ; Restore the frame to its original
                        size

    See Also Maximize, Minimize


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.21. SelectItem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SelectItem

The SelectItem method is used to select an item in a list.

    Applies To Combo Box  List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.SelectItem ( SHORT Index )

    Parameters

       Index     Value representing the position in the list of the item to
                 select.

    Return Value None

    Remarks Like other methods which act on lists, the list index is
            zero-based.

    Example The example uses SelectItem to select the item in the list box that
            is in the first position.

                        Frame1.Listbox1.SelectItem(0)

    See Also DeselectItem


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.22. SetColor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetColor

The SetColor method sets the specified presentation parameter color of a
window.

    Applies To All Windows

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.SetColor ( LONG presparm, LONG color
                        )

    Parameters

       presparm  index of presentation parameter to set color for.

       color     color to set.

    Return Value None

    Remarks The SetColor method sets the color value to a predefined color (see
            below) or a color constructed from the RGB function. Specifying a
            color of -1 will delete any previously specified color for this ID.
            The following predefined constants are available for colors: The
            following predefined constants are available for presentation
            parameters IDs:

    Example

                        ; Set the foreground color for our frame to Red
                        Frame1.SetColor ( PP_Foreground, RGB_Red )
                        ; Set the background color of our frame to Blue
                        Frame1.SetColor ( PP_Background, RGB_Blue )

    See Also GetColor, RGB, SetFont


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.23. SetFont ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetFont

The SetFont method sets the presentation parameter font of a window.

    Applies To All Windows

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.SetFont ( STRING font )

    Parameters

       font      the font to be set for the window.

    Return Value None

    Remarks The SetFont method sets the font presentation parameter of the
            window. If the font parameter is Null or an empty string, the
            presentation parameter is removed and the standard system font is
            used by the window. The font name is specified in the following :

                        size.facename.options

       size      the point size of the font, eg. 12

       facename  the font name, eg. Helvetica

       options   any combination of: outline, underscore, strikeout

    Example

                        ; Set the current font for our frame window
                        Frame1.SetFont("8.helv")

                        ; Set the font for the text field
                        Frame1.Static1.SetFont("24.Tms Rmn.Underscore")

    See Also EnumFonts, GetColor, GetFont, SetColor


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.24. SetItemHandle ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetItemHandle

The SetItemHandle method is used to set the optional handle for a list entry.

    Applies To Combo Box  List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.SetItemHandle( SHORT Index, LONG Handle
                        )

    Parameters

       Index     the number of the desired item (zero-based)

       Handle    Handle value to assign to the item identified by Index.

    Return Value None

    Remarks Each item in a list box or combo box may be assigned a handle (of
            type LONG) which is used to store extra information not readily
            displayable in the list box. The SetItemHandle method is used to
            set this handle.

    Example The example uses SetItemHandle to set the handle value of all items
            in a list box to their index in an array of structures.

                        STRUCT Customer ; Define the Customer structure
                            STRING Name
                            STRING Address
                        end

                        ; Declare an array of 20 customers
                        Customer Cust[20]
                          ┬╖
                          ┬╖
                          ┬╖
                        ; Read in the Customer Data
                          ┬╖
                          ┬╖
                        LONG    Counter
                        LONG    CusIndex

                        for Counter = 0 to 19
                           ; Insert the Names in Ascending Order
                           CusIndex = Frame1.Listbox1.InsertItem (Cust[Counter].Name, -2)
                           ; Set the Item Handle to be the array index
                           Frame1.Listbox1.SetItemHandle (CusIndex, Counter)
                        end

    See Also GetItemHandle


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.25. SetItemText ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

SetItemText

The SetItemText method is used to set the text of a specified item in a list.

    Applies To Combo Box  List Box

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.SetItemText ( SHORT Index, STRING Text
                        )

    Parameters

       Index     number of the desired item in the list (zero-based)

       Text      String representing the text to set the item identified by
                 Index

    Return Value None

    Remarks Like all functions and methods associated with lists, SetItemText
            uses zero-based indexing for the Item Index.

    Example The example uses SetItemText to set the text of the currently
            selected item to "Selected".

                        Frame1.Listbox1.SetItemText(Frame1.Listbox1.Selection,
                        "Selected")

    See Also GetItemText


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2.26. Unload ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Unload

The Unload method causes the specified window to be destroyed.

    Syntax

                        VOID <Window>.Unload ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Destroy event is called before this method returns. All memory
            associated with the window is freed during processing of this
            method.

    Example This example loads in a dialog window, calls the Process method and
            finally destroys the dialog when the Process method finishes. These
            three statements are equivalent to the Invoke method.

                        Dialog1.Load (Frame1) ;Create the dialog window.
                        Dialog1.Process () ;Wait until Dismiss called.
                        Dialog1.Unload ()  ;Destroy the dialog window.

    See Also Dismiss, Invoke, Load, Process


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Properties Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Properties Reference

This section describes the properties of the Guidelines Controls.

    Γûá Checked
    Γûá Count
    Γûá Default
    Γûá Enabled
    Γûá Height
    Γûá Icon
    Γûá ID
    Γûá Max
    Γûá MaxLength
    Γûá Min
    Γûá MousePtr
    Γûá Owner
    Γûá Parent
    Γûá Pos
    Γûá Selection
    Γûá Text
    Γûá TopIndex
    Γûá Update
    Γûá Visible
    Γûá Width
    Γûá XPos
    Γûá YPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.1. Checked ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Checked

The Checked Property is used to determine if a button is displaying a check
mark or to set the check state of a button.

    Applies To Three-State Check Box, Check Box, Menu Item, Push Button, Radio
            Button, User Button

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Checked

    Remarks The Checked Property will contain one of the following values:

       0         not checked

       1         checked

       2         greyed (Three-State Check Boxes only)

            Any of the above values may be used to set the Check state of the
            control.

    Example The example uses the Checked property to get the check-state of a
            radio button and enable other controls accordingly.

                        if Frame1.RadioButton1.Checked = 1 then
                            Frame1.Checkbox1.Enabled = False   ; Disable Checkbox 1
                            Frame1.Checkbox2.Enabled = True    ; Enable Checkbox  2
                            endif

    See Also Visible, Enabled


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.2. Count ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Count

The Count property returns the total number of items within a list box or combo
box.

    Applies To Combo Box List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Count

    Remarks This property is read-only, ie. it cannot be directly set to a new
            value. Its value may be changed indirectly, using the AppendItem,
            ClearItems, DeleteItem and InsertItem methods.

            A return value of zero indicates that the list box or combo box is
            empty.

    Example The example uses the Count property to retrieve the number of
            entries in a list box, and places the value in numItems.

                        SHORT numItems

                        numItems = Frame1.Listbox1.Count

    See Also Selection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.3. Default ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Default

The Default property is used to query or set the default status of a button.

    Applies To Push button, User button

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Default

    Remarks The Default property is a boolean value. Setting it to True denotes
            that the button will receive a Click event if the [Enter] key is
            pressed, regardless of the focus (this will only work in Dialogs).

            It will also cause a thick border to be drawn around the button.
            Only one button in a dialog should have this flag set - it is
            usually the Ok button. Normal buttons do not have this flag set.

    Example This example sets the Add button to the Default instead of the Ok
            button.

                        OptionsDialog.OkButton.Default  = False
                        OptionsDialog.AddButton.Default = True

    See Also Enabled, Visible


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.4. Enabled ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enabled

The Enabled property indicates whether or not the specified window is enabled.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Enabled

    Remarks The Enabled property is a boolean value. Setting it to True will
            enable the window; setting it to False will disable the window.
            Some control windows will display themselves greyed-out when
            disabled. The Enabled property can also be used to grey-out menu
            items.

    Example The example uses the Enabled property to set the condition of a
            Push Button to disabled.

                        Frame1.PushButton1.Enabled = False

    See Also Visible


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.5. Height ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Height

The Height property contains the vertical size of the window.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Height

    Remarks The Height property is always measured in window coordinates
            (pixels) and may be used to change the height of the window.

    Example The example uses the Height property to double the size of the
            frame window.

                        Frame1.Height = Frame1.Height * 2

    See Also Width, XPos, YPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.6. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Icon

The Icon Property is used to query or set the icon displayed in a icon control.

    Applies To Icon

    Syntax

                        IMAGE <Window>.Icon

    Remarks The Icon to be displayed is selected from the icon resources
            defined in the application, and can also be loaded at run time,
            using the LoadImage function.

    Example This example uses the Icon property to change the icon in a control
            depending on the state of a check box.

                        if Frame1.Checkbox1.Checked
                        then
                            Frame1.Icon1.Icon = Traffic1
                        else
                            Frame1.Icon1.Icon = Traffic2
                        endif

    See Also


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.7. ID ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ID

The ID property can be used to query or set the ID of a control or window.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.ID

    Remarks Controls and menu items send their ID to their owners whenever they
            wish to signal an event. Caution should therefore be taken when
            modifying an object's ID as the generated code will be attempting
            to trap events from the original ID. A possible use of the ID
            property is to change a control's ID to that of another control so
            that both controls will signal the same event.

    Example The example uses the ID property to retrieve the ID of a push
            button.

                        SHORT anId

                        anId = Frame1.Pushbutton1.ID

    See Also Owner, Parent


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.8. Max ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Max

The Max property is used to set and query the maximum value for a scroll bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bars, Vertical Scroll Bars

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Max

    Remarks The Max property is used in conjunction with Min and Pos The value
            of Pos must be less than or equal to Max.

    Example

                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Max = 20
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Min = 0
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Pos = 10

    See Also Min, Pos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.9. MaxLength ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MaxLength

The MaxLength property is used to get the maximum text length for an entry
field.

    Applies To Entry Field, MLE

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.MaxLength

    Remarks The MaxLength property defaults to 32 characters for an entry
            field.

    Example The example uses the MaxLength property to set the maximum length
            of an Entry Field to 20 characters.

                        Frame1.EntryField1.MaxLength = 20

    See Also Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.10. MaxSel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MaxSel

If the user has selected some or all of the text in an Entry Field or MLE, the
MaxSel property represents the position of the last character selected.

    Applies To Entry Field, MLE

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.MaxSel

    Remarks MaxSel is used in conjunction with the MinSel property to denote
            the start and end of the selected text.  Given the following
            example (where the selected text is in pink):

                        This text is selected from MinSel to MaxSel.

            the value of MinSel would be 11, and MaxSel would be 36.  The
            selected portion of the text can be retrieved using the Mid
            function. If there is no selected text, the values of MinSel and
            MaxSel are zero.

    Example

                        STRING SelectedText

                        SelectedText = Mid (Frame1.EntryField1.Text,
                                            Frame1.EntryField1.MinSel,
                                            Frame1.EntryField1.MaxSel)

    See Also MinSel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.11. Min ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Min

The Min property is used to set and query the minimum value for a scroll bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bars, Vertical Scroll Bars

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Min

    Remarks The Min property is used in conjunction with Max and Pos The value
            of Pos must be greater than or equal to Min.

    Example

                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Min = 0
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Max = 20
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Pos = 10

    See Also Max, Pos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.12. MinSel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MinSel

If the user has selected some or all of the text in an Entry Field or  MLE the
MinSel property represents the position of the first character selected.

    Applies To Entry Field, MLE

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.MinSel

    Remarks MinSel is used in conjunction with the MaxSel property to denote
            the start and end of the selected text.  Given the following
            example (where the selected text is in pink):

                        This text is selected from MinSel to MaxSel.

            the value of MaxSel would be 36, and MinSel would be 11. The
            selected portion of the text can be retrieved using the Mid
            function. If there is no selected text, the values of MaxSel and
            MinSel are zero.

    Example

                        STRING SelectedText

                        SelectedText = Mid (Frame1.EntryField1.Text,
                                            Frame1.EntryField1.MinSel,
                                            Frame1.EntryField1.MaxSel)

    See Also MaxSel


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.13. MousePtr ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MousePtr

The MousePtr property is used to set the pointer/icon which is displayed while
the mouse is over the specified window/control.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        IMAGE <Window>.MousePtr

    Remarks If the MousePtr property is set for a control, the mouse pointer
            changes to that image while over that control. If set for a frame
            or dialog window, the pointer changes to that image while it is
            anywhere within the boundaries of the window, including over
            control windows if they do not have the MousePtr property set.

            The default behaviour of the mouse pointer may be restored by
            assigning this property the value of Null. Mouse pointers can be
            set to any icon/pointer resource, or any of the following
            predefined system pointers:

       SPtr_Arrow Standard system arrow pointer

       SPtr_IBeam Entry field I-beam pointer

       SPtr_Wait System hourglass pointer

       SPtr_Move Move pointer

       SPtr_SizeNWSE Size north-west / south-east

       SPtr_SizeNESW Size north-east / south-west

       SPtr_SizeEW Size east-west

       SPtr_SizeNS Size north-south

       SPtr_AppIcon Standard application icon

       SPtr_Information Information icon

       SPtr_Question Question mark icon

       SPtr_Error Error icon

       SPtr_Warning Warning icon

       SPtr_Illegal Illegal pointer

       SPtr_File File pointer

       SPtr_Folder Folder pointer

       SPtr_MultFile Multiple-file pointer

       SPtr_Program Program pointer

    Example

                        Frame1.PushButton1.MousePtr = SPtr_Move
                        Frame1.MousePtr = Null

    See Also Null


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.14. Owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Owner

The Owner property specifies the owner window of a window.

    Applies To All Window Types except Menu Item

    Syntax

                        WINDOW <Window>.Owner

    Remarks Any given window is positioned on top of its owner window. Windows
            may (optionally) be specified to always move when their owner
            window moves. Control windows (and menus) always send their
            notification events to their owner windows. Ownership does not
            affect child window positioning or clipping (see Parent property).
            Dialog windows processed with their owner set to another window
            become modal to the owner window chain.

    Example This example uses the Owner property to make a dialog box modal to
            another frame window.

                        Dialog1.Owner = Frame2  ; Set owner to Frame 2

    See Also ID, Parent


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.15. Parent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Parent

The Parent property specifies the parent window of a window.

    Applies To All Window Types except Menu Item

    Syntax

                        WINDOW <Window>.Parent

    Remarks Any given window is positioned relative to its parent window. All
            windows are also clipped within their parent windows. Parent
            windows are not the same as Owner windows. A window may specify its
            parent as being the Desktop (which means it is not clipped to
            anything), but have its owner window set to another frame window
            (which will receive any notification events).

    Example This example sets the Parent property of a Dialog Box to the
            Desktop to ensure that it is not clipped to any window.

                        Dialog1.Parent = Desktop  ; Set parent to Desktop

    See Also ID, Owner


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.16. Pos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Pos

The Pos property is used to set and query the current position of a scroll bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bars, Vertical Scroll Bars

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Pos

    Remarks

    Example

                        Frame1.HScrollbar11.Min = 0
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Max = 20
                        Frame1.HScrollbar1.Pos = 10

    See Also Min, Max


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.17. Selection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Selection

The Selection property returns the first selection from a list.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Selection

    Remarks A returned vlaue of -1 indicates that no item in the list is
            currently selected. For controls with a multiple-selection style,
            this property is used to get the first selection, then the
            NextSelection method is used to get subsequent selections.

    Example The example uses the Selection property to find the index of the
            selected item in a single-selection list box. The result is placed
            in i.

                        SHORT i

                        i = Frame1.Listbox1.Selection

    See Also NextSelection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.18. Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Text

The Text property contains the text value of a control or window.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        STRING <Window>.Text

    Remarks For top-level windows, the Text property represents the contents of
            the title-bar. For other controls, the Text property may have
            different meanings. Controls such as scroll-bars do not use text
            values. List boxes ignore it as well, however a combo box will use
            the Text property as the contents of its entry field.

    Example This example uses the Text property to change the text value of a
            Push Button.

                        Frame1.Pushbutton1.Text = "New Title"

    See Also Name


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.19. TopIndex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

TopIndex

The TopIndex property is used to query or set the index of the item displayed
at the top of a list.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.TopIndex

    Remarks An index of zero indicates the first item of the list box is
            displayed at the top. A value of -1 indicates that the list box is
            empty.

    Example The example uses the TopIndex property to retrieve the index of the
            currently displayed top item in a list box. The result is placed in
            i.

                        i = Frame1.Listbox1.TopIndex

    See Also Selection


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.20. Update ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Update

The Update property is used to turn updating of a window on or off.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Update

    Remarks Setting the Update property of a window to False will cause updates
            to the window to be stopped. This allows you to make multiple
            changes to a window and then turn update back on True to allow it
            to repaint without any flicker.

    Example

                        ; Change the window colours and font
                        ; Turn update off first
                        Frame1.Update = False
                        Frame1.SetColour ( PP_Foreground, RGB_Yellow )
                        Frame1.SetColour ( PP_Background, RGB_Blue )
                        Frame1.SetFont ( "8.Helv" )
                        ; Now, allow the update to occur
                        Frame1.Update = True

    See Also Visible


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.21. Visible ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Visible

The Visible property is used to query or set the current visibility of a
window.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Visible

    Remarks Setting the Visible property of a window to False will cause the
            window to be hidden; setting it back to True will cause the window
            to be redisplayed.

    Example The example uses the Visible property to hide a combo box.

                        Frame1.Combobox1.Visible = False

    See Also Enabled, Hide


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.22. Width ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Width

The Width property contains the horizontal size of the window.

    Applies To All Window Types except Menu Item

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.Width

    Remarks The Width property is always measured in window coordinates
            (pixels) and may be used to change the width of the window.

    Example The example uses the Width property to double the size of the frame
            window.

                        Frame1.Width = Frame1.Width * 2

    See Also Height, XPos, YPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.23. XPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

XPos

The XPos property contains the horizontal position of the left-hand edge of the
window, measured from the left of the screen.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.XPos

    Remarks The XPos property is always measured in window coordinates (pixels)
            and may be used to change the horizontal position of the window.
            The XPos property is not always meaningful since some windows, eg.
            menu items, do not have actual positions.

    Example The example uses the XPos property to double the distance of the
            frame window from the left edge of the screen.

                        Frame1.XPos = Frame1.XPos * 2

    See Also Height, Width, YPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3.24. YPos ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

YPos

The YPos property contains the vertical position of the bottom edge of the
window, measured from the bottom of the screen.

    Applies To All Window Types

    Syntax

                        SHORT <Window>.YPos

    Remarks The YPos property is always measured in window coordinates (pixels)
            and may be used to change the vertical position of the window. The
            YPos property is not always meaningful since some windows, eg. menu
            items, do not have actual positions.

    Example The example uses the YPos property to double the distance of the
            frame window from the bottom of the screen.

                        Frame1.YPos = Frame1.YPos * 2

    See Also Height, Width, XPos


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Event Reference ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Event Reference

This section describes the Events which can occur for (and be handled by)
Guidelines Controls.

    Γûá Activate
    Γûá Btn1Down
    Γûá Btn1Up
    Γûá Btn2Down
    Γûá Btn2Up
    Γûá Change
    Γûá Click
    Γûá Close
    Γûá Create
    Γûá DblClick
    Γûá Deactivate
    Γûá Destroy
    Γûá End
    Γûá EndScroll
    Γûá Enter
    Γûá Error
    Γûá Exit
    Γûá GainFocus
    Γûá Hide
    Γûá HScroll
    Γûá Init
    Γûá LineDown
    Γûá LineLeft
    Γûá LineRight
    Γûá LineUp
    Γûá LoseFocus
    Γûá MouseMove
    Γûá PageDown
    Γûá PageLeft
    Γûá PageRight
    Γûá PageUp
    Γûá Paint
    Γûá Select
    Γûá Show
    Γûá ShowList
    Γûá Shutdown
    Γûá Size
    Γûá ThreadEnded
    Γûá Track
    Γûá VScroll


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.1. Activate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Activate

The Activate Event signals that the dialog or frame window has been made
active.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Activate ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event occurs when the user selects the dialog or frame, or one
            of their controls with the mouse, or via the keyboard.

    Example

                        VOID AppFrame.Activate ()

                        end

    See Also Deactivate


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.2. Btn1Down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Btn1Down

This message is sent to frame windows when the user presses mouse button 1
(normally the left button) in the client area.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Btn1Down (SHORT x, SHORT y)

                        end

    Parameters

       x         the horizontal position of the mouse pointer

       y         the vertical position of the mouse pointer

    Return Value None

    Remarks The x and y parameters give the co-ordinates of the mouse at the
            point where it was clicked.

    Example This example will draw lines from point to point, saving the last
            point in a structure.

                        VOID TestFrame.Btn1Down (SHORT x, SHORT y)
                            LONG    ps

                            ps = GetPS (TestFrame)
                            MoveTo (ps, OldPoint.x, OldPoint.y)
                            OldPoint.x = x
                            OldPoint.y = y
                            DrawLine (ps, x, y)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also Btn1Up, Btn2Down, Btn2Up


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.3. Btn1Up ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Btn1Up

This message is sent to frame windows when the user releases mouse button 1
(normally the left button) in the client area.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Btn1Up (SHORT x, SHORT y)

                        end

    Parameters

       x         the horizontal position of the mouse pointer

       y         the vertical position of the mouse pointer

    Return Value None

    Remarks The x and y parameters give the co-ordinates of the mouse at the
            point where it was clicked.

    Example This example will draw lines from point to point, saving the last
            point in a structure.

                        VOID TestFrame.Btn1Up (SHORT x, SHORT y)
                            LONG    ps

                            ps = GetPS (TestFrame)
                            MoveTo (ps, OldPoint.x, OldPoint.y)
                            OldPoint.x = x
                            OldPoint.y = y
                            DrawLine (ps, x, y)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also Btn1Down, Btn2Down, Btn2Up


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.4. Btn2Down ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Btn2Down

This message is sent to frame windows when the user presses mouse button 2
(normally the right button) in the client area.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Btn2Down (SHORT x, SHORT y)

                        end

    Parameters

       x         the horizontal position of the mouse pointer

       y         the vertical position of the mouse pointer

    Return Value None

    Remarks The x and y parameters give the co-ordinates of the mouse at the
            point where it was clicked.

    Example This example will draw lines from point to point, saving the last
            point in a structure.

                        VOID TestFrame.Btn2Down (SHORT x, SHORT y)
                            LONG    ps

                            ps = GetPS (TestFrame)
                            MoveTo (ps, OldPoint.x, OldPoint.y)
                            OldPoint.x = x
                            OldPoint.y = y
                            DrawLine (ps, x, y)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also Btn1Down, Btn1Up, Btn2Up


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.5. Btn2Up ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Btn2Up

This message is sent to frame windows when the user releases mouse button 2
(normally the right button) in the client area.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Btn2Up (SHORT x, SHORT y)

                        end

    Parameters

       x         the horizontal position of the mouse pointer

       y         the vertical position of the mouse pointer

    Return Value None

    Remarks The x and y parameters give the co-ordinates of the mouse at the
            point where it was clicked.

    Example This example will draw lines from point to point, saving the last
            point in a structure.

                        VOID TestFrame.Btn2Up (SHORT x, SHORT y)
                            LONG    ps

                            ps = GetPS (TestFrame)
                            MoveTo (ps, OldPoint.x, OldPoint.y)
                            OldPoint.x = x
                            OldPoint.y = y
                            DrawLine (ps, x, y)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also Btn1Down, Btn1Up, Btn2Down


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.6. Change ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Change

The Change Event signals that the contents of the control have changed.

    Applies To Combo Boxes, Entry Field, Horizontal Scroll Bars, MLE, Vertical

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.<EntryField>.Change ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks For combo boxes, this event occurs when the contents of the entry
            field portion of the control have changed.

    Example

                        VOID MainFrame.NameField.Change ()
                            MainFrame.NameList.SetItemText (MainFrame.NameList.Current,
                                                            MainFrame.NameField.Text)
                        end

    See Also Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.7. Click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Click

The Click Event occurs when the user clicks on a button control or a menu item.

    Applies To Three-State Check Box, Check Box, Menu Item, Push Button, Radio
            Button, User Button

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Click ()

                        end

    Remarks A user may select a control and generate the click event in the
            following ways:

       o By clicking a control with the left mouse button

       o By pressing the [Spacebar] when a button has the input focus (only in
         Dialogs)

       o By pressing the [Enter] key when there is a default button on the
         current window (only in Dialogs)

    Example This example shows how to close a dialog when Ok is clicked.

                        VOID Dialog1.OkButton.Click ()
                            Dialog1.Dismiss (0)
                        end

    See Also DblClick


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.8. Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Close

The Close Event occurs when a frame or dialog window is being closed.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        SHORT Frame1.Close ()
                            ;Return False to cancel the close
                            return True
                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value

       True      to continue to close the window,

       False     to cancel closing.

    Remarks The Close event may be used to carry about processing which may be
            required before the frame or dialog window is destroyed.

    Example Here the example shows how to prevent a window closing if there are
            any unsaved changes.

                        SHORT Frame1.Close ()
                            if UnsavedChanges = False then
                                return True
                            else
                                return False
                            endif
                        end

    See Also Destroy


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.9. Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create

The Create Event occurs when a Frame or Dialog is being created.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Create ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Create event gives the application the opportunity to
            initialize the window before it is displayed. It is typically used
            to set the correct check state of buttons, to initialize entry
            fields, etc.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.Create ()
                            Frame1.NameField = "None"
                            Frame1.CreditCheck.Checked = False
                        end

    See Also Destroy


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.10. DblClick ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

DblClick

This event occurs when a user double-clicks on a button control with the left
mouse button.

    Applies To Three-State Check Box, Check Box, Push Button, Radio Button,

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.DblClick ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The double-click event is rarely used with controls - the Click
            event is normally used.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.Button1.DblClick ()
                            OptionsDlg.Invoke (Frame1)
                        end

    See Also Click


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.11. Deactivate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Deactivate

This event occurs when a frame or dialog is no longer the active window.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Deactivate ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks A window receives the Deactivate event when the user selects
            another window, either with the mouse or with the keyboard.  It is
            the opposite of the Activate event.

    Example This code shows how to suspend the execution of a background thread
            when the window is deactivated.

                        VOID Frame1.Deactivate ()
                            SleepThread (WorkerThread)
                        end

    See Also Activate


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.12. Destroy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Destroy

This event occurs when a Frame or Dialog is being destroyed.

    Applies To Dialog, Frames

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Destroy ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event occurs after a window being destroyed is no longer
            visible, giving the window the opportunity to perform some
            termination action on the window.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.Destroy ()
                            ; Close the database connection
                            CloseConnection ()
                        end

    See Also Create


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.13. End ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

End

This event gives you control over whether or not a menu item will be processed.

    Applies To Menu bar

    Prototype

                        SHORT <Window>.End ()

                            ;Return True to select menu item,
                            ;otherwise False to ignore request.
                            return True
                        end

    Remarks ***

    Example ***

    See Also Enabled


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.14. EndScroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

EndScroll

The EndScroll event is used to inform the application that a user has finished
scrolling a scroll bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bar Vertical Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.EndScroll ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks Once the EndScroll event has been received, the frame should update
            its contents accordingly, using the Pos property of the scrollbar
            to determine what to display.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.HorzScrollbar.EndScroll ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also Track


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.15. Enter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Enter

The Enter event is used to inform the application that a user has selected an
item in a list box or combo box

    Applies To Combo box List box

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Enter ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event occurs in either of two ways:

       o When the user presses the [Enter] key when the control has the input
         focus; or

       o when the user selects an item in the list by double-clicking on it
         with the left mouse button.

    Example

                        VOID Listbox1.Enter ()
                            EditDetailsFor (Listbox1.Selection)
                        end

    See Also Select


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.16. Error ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Error

This event is used to inform the application that the control could not
allocate enough memory to store its data.

    Applies To Combo box, Entry field, MLE

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Error ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks

    Example

    See Also Text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.17. Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Exit

The Exit event is used to allow the application to perform processing just
before it exits.

    Applies To Applications

    Prototype

                        VOID Application.Exit ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Exit event may be used to clean up after execution of an
            application, prior to the application exiting.

    Example

                        VOID Application.Exit ()
                            ; clean up and
                            ; exit nicely
                            CloseDatabase ()
                            Logout ()
                        end

    See Also Init


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.18. GainFocus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GainFocus

This event occurs when the control gains the input focus.

    Applies To Entry field, List box, MLE

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.GainFocus ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event is used to inform the application that the user has
            given the associated control the input focus and gives the control
            the oportunity to carry out some processing before the user makes
            any further changes.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.NameField.GainFocus ()
                            ; find out the current name selected and set the field up
                            ; so the user can edit the details
                            Frame1.NameField.Text = GetCurrentName (NameList.Selection)
                        end

    See Also LoseFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.19. Hide ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Hide

This event occurs when a frame or dialog, window is hidden.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Hide ()

                        end

    Remarks None

    Example None

    See Also Show


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.20. HScroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

HScroll

This event occurs when the user causes a control to scroll horizontally.

    Applies To Combo Box, Entry Field, MLE

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.HScroll ()

                        end

    Remarks The control may be scrolled horizontally by using either the cursor
            keys, or by using the horizontal scroll bars (if applicable).

    Example None

    See Also VScroll


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.21. Init ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Init

The Init event is used to allow the application to perform processing before
its GUI component has been initialized.

    Applies To Applications

    Prototype

                        VOID Application.Init ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The Init event may be used to set up an application, before the
            application's windows have been created. For non-GUI applications,
            the main code for the application is entered into the Init action
            module. When control returns from this module, the application's
            Exit module is called and the application is terminated.

    See Also Exit


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.22. LineDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LineDown

This event occurs when the user scrolls down one line by selecting the down
arrow on a vertical scroll bar.

    Applies To Vertical Scroll Bars

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.LineDown ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.VertScroll.LineDown ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineLeft, LineRight, LineUp, PageDown


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.23. LineLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LineLeft

This event occurs when the user scrolls left one line by selecting the left
arrow on a horizontal scroll bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.LineLeft ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.HorzScroll.LineLeft ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineDown, LineRight, LineUp, PageLeft


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.24. LineRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LineRight

This event occurs when the user scrolls right one line by selecting the right
arrow on a horizontal scroll bar

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.LineRight ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.HorzScroll.LineRight ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineDown, LineLeft, LineUp, PageRight


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.25. LineUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LineUp

This event occurs when the user scrolls up one line by selecting the up arrow
on a vertical scroll bar.

    Applies To Vertical Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.LineUp ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.VertScroll.LineUp ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineDown, LineLeft, LineRight, PageUp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.26. LoseFocus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LoseFocus

This event occurs when the control loses the input focus.

    Applies To Entry Field, List Box, MLE

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.LoseFocus ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event is used to inform the application that the user has
            taken away the input focus from the associated control and gives
            the control the oportunity to carry out some processing before the
            user moves to the next control.

    Example

    See Also GainFocus, GiveFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.27. MouseMove ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MouseMove

This event is sent continously as the mouse moves over the window.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.MouseMove (SHORT x, SHORT y)

                        end

    Parameters

       x         The x-axis co-ordinate of the current mouse position

       y         The y-axis co-ordinate of the current mouse position

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event gets sent constantly as the user moves the mouse inside
            the window. It might be used to show the co-ordinates in a status
            bar, as the example shows.

    Example

                        VOID DrawFrame.MouseMove (SHORT x, SHORT y)
                            Status.Pos.Text = Str (x) + "," + Str (y)
                        end

    See Also Btn1Down, Btn1Up, Btn2Down, Btn2Up


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.28. Overflow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Overflow

This event occurs when the Entry Field reaches its maximum length (set by the
MaxLength property) and the user tries to enter more characters.

    Applies To Entry Field

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Overflow ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The default action for the system is to issue a warning beep.

    Example

    See Also Error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.29. PageDown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PageDown

This event occurs when the user scrolls down one page on a vertical scroll bar.

    Applies To Vertical Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.PageDown ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.VertScroll.PageDown ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineDown, PageLeft, PageRight, PageUp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.30. PageLeft ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PageLeft

This event occurs when the user scrolls left one page on a horizontal scroll
bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.PageLeft ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.VertScroll.PageDown ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineLeft, PageDown, PageRight, PageUp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.31. PageRight ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PageRight

This event occurs when the user scrolls right one page on a horizontal scroll
bar.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.PageRight ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.HorzScroll.PageRight ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineRight, PageDown, PageLeft, PageUp


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.32. PageUp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

PageUp

This event occurs when the user scrolls up one page on a vertical scroll bar.

    Applies To Vertical Scroll Bar

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.PageUp ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The frame is responsible for updating its contents upon receiving a
            scrollbar message.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.VertScroll.PageUp ()
                            LONG ps

                            ; Force a repaint of
                            ; the new display
                            ps = GetPS (Frame1)
                            Frame1.Paint (ps)
                            ReleasePS (ps)
                        end

    See Also LineUp, PageDown, PageLeft, PageRight


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.33. Paint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Paint

This event is sent to the frame window whenever the client area needs
repainting.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Paint (LONG ps)

                        end

    Parameters

       ps        The handle to the presentation space

    Return Value None

    Remarks The presentation space handle (ps) is used as an argument to the
            graphics functions ( DrawLine, FillCircle, etc), and is valid only
            within the event.  If any drawing needs to be performed outside the
            event, GetPS and ReleasePS should be used to bracket the drawing.
            The GetClientRect method should be used to determine the valid
            drawing area.

    Example This example shows how to paint a circle half as wide as the window
            in the center of the frame.

                        VOID Frame1.Paint (LONG ps)
                            Frame1.GetClientRect (x, y, cx, cy)
                            MoveTo (ps, x/2, y/2)
                            FillCircle (ps, cx/2)
                        end

    See Also GetClientRect


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.34. Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Select

The Select event occurs when the user highlights a selection in a list.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Select ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks A selection in a list box or combo box may be highlighted by either
            clicking on it with the left mouse button or by moving to it using
            the keyboard and pressing the spacebar.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.NameList.Select ()
                            LONG    rec

                            ; Get the item's handle and load the record from
                            ; the database
                            rec = Frame1.NameList.GetItemHandle (Frame1.NameList.Selection)
                            LoadRecord (rec)
                            ┬╖┬╖┬╖

    See Also Enter


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.35. Show ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Show

This event occurs when a frame or dialog window is made visible.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Show ()

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks If a window is made visible again, the Show event gives the
            application a chance to perform checking or processing before the
            window is redisplayed.

    Example

    See Also Hide


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.36. ShowList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ShowList

The ShowList event occurs when the user presses the drop-down button on a combo
box to display the list.

    Applies To Combo Box

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.ShowList ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event will not be sent if the combo box box is of the Simple
            style, since the list is constantly displayed.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.DriveCombo.ShowList ()
                            StatusBar.HelpMsg.Text = "Select the desired drive from the list."
                        end

    See Also GiveFocus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.37. Shutdown ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Shutdown

When the user opts to shut down the system, this event gives the application an
opportunity to perform cleanup and termination processing, and also allows the
application to refuse to be shut down.

    Applies To Frame

    Prototype

                        SHORT Frame1.Shutdown ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value To cancel the shutdown procedure, return False The default is
            to return True

    Remarks The application should have good reason to refuse a shutdown.

    Example

                        SHORT Frame1.Shutdown ()
                            if SecurityMode = True then
                                return False
                            else
                                return True
                            endif
                        end

    See Also Close, Exit


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.38. Size ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Size

This event occurs when the size of a frame or dialog window has changed.

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.Size ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event may be used to arrange the contents of the dialog or
            frame window to suit the new size of the window.

    Example

    See Also Hide, Show


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.39. ThreadEnded ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

ThreadEnded

This event occurs when a thread is ended

    Applies To Dialog, Frame

    Prototype

                        VOID Frame1.ThreadEnded (THREAD Thd, LONG RetCode)

                        end

    Parameters

       Thd       Identifies the thread which has just ended

       RetCode   The return code from the ExitThread function

    Remarks The ThreadEnded event is used to inform the window owning the
            thread, that it has completed, and to return the thread's return
            code to the application.

    Example

                        VOID Frame1.ThreadEnded (THREAD Thd, LONG RetCode)
                            if Thd = PrintThread then
                                ; tell the user we finished printing
                                InvokeMessage (Frame1, BackgroundPrintDone)
                                ; re-enable the print option
                                Frame1.FilePrint.Enabled = True
                            endif
                            DestroyThread (Thd)
                        end

    See Also CreateThread, DestroyThread


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.40. Track ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Track

This event signals that the slider of a scroll bar  is being dragged using the
mouse and has changed its position.

    Applies To Horizontal Scroll Bars, Vertical Scroll Bars

    Prototype

                        VOID <Scrollbar>.Track ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks This event is continuously sent while the user drags the
            scrollbar's slider. Once the user releases the mouse button, the
            EndScroll event is sent.

    Example

                        VOID MainFrame.VertScroll.Track ()
                            StatusBar.Info1.Text = "Tracking at " + Str(MainFrame.VertScroll.Pos)
                        end

    See Also EndScroll


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4.41. VScroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

VScroll

The VScroll event occurs when the user scrolls a list vertically.

    Applies To Combo Box, List Box

    Prototype

                        VOID <Window>.VScroll ()

                        end

    Parameters None

    Return Value None

    Remarks The control may be scrolled vertically by using either the cursor
            keys, or by using the vertical scroll bars (if applicable).

    Example

    See Also HScroll


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Miscellaneous Topics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Guidelines Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Guidelines Messages

Following is a list of all the messages displayed by Guidelines.

    Γûá GUI1001P
    Γûá GUI1002P
    Γûá GUI1003P
    Γûá GUI1004P
    Γûá GUI1005P
    Γûá GUI1006P
    Γûá GUI1007P
    Γûá GUI1008P
    Γûá GUI1009P
    Γûá GUI1010P
    Γûá GUI1011P
    Γûá GUI1012P
    Γûá GUI1013P
    Γûá GUI1014P
    Γûá GUI1015P
    Γûá GUI1020W
    Γûá GUI1021W
    Γûá GUI1022W
    Γûá GUI1023W
    Γûá GUI1024W
    Γûá GUI1025P
    Γûá GUI1026P
    Γûá GUI1027W
    Γûá GUI1028W
    Γûá GUI1029W
    Γûá GUI1030I
    Γûá GUI1031I
    Γûá GUI1040W
    Γûá GUI1041W
    Γûá GUI1042W
    Γûá GUI1043E
    Γûá GUI1050E
    Γûá GUI1051E
    Γûá GUI1052W
    Γûá GUI1053W
    Γûá GUI1054W
    Γûá GUI1055W
    Γûá GUI1056W
    Γûá GUI1060E
    Γûá GUI1061E
    Γûá GUI1062E
    Γûá GUI1063E
    Γûá GUI1064W
    Γûá GUI1065W
    Γûá GUI1066W
    Γûá GUI1067W
    Γûá GUI1068E
    Γûá GUI1069P
    Γûá GUI1075W
    Γûá GUI1076W
    Γûá GUI1080W
    Γûá GUI1081W
    Γûá GUI1082W
    Γûá GUI1083W
    Γûá GUI1084W
    Γûá GUI1085W
    Γûá GUI1086W
    Γûá GUI1087W
    Γûá GUI1088W
    Γûá GUI1089W
    Γûá GUI1090W
    Γûá GUI1091W
    Γûá GUI1092W
    Γûá GUI1100W
    Γûá GUI1101W
    Γûá GUI1102W
    Γûá GUI1103W
    Γûá GUI1104W
    Γûá GUI1105W
    Γûá GUI1106W
    Γûá GUI1107W
    Γûá GUI1108W
    Γûá GUI1110E
    Γûá GUI1111W
    Γûá GUI1112W
    Γûá GUI1113I
    Γûá GUI1114I
    Γûá GUI1115W
    Γûá GUI1120E
    Γûá GUI1121E
    Γûá GUI1122W
    Γûá GUI1123W
    Γûá GUI1124W
    Γûá GUI1130W
    Γûá GUI1131W
    Γûá GUI1132I
    Γûá GUI1133W
    Γûá GUI1134W
    Γûá GUI1135I
    Γûá GUI1136W
    Γûá GUI1137W
    Γûá GUI1138W
    Γûá GUI1140I
    Γûá GUI1141I
    Γûá GUI1142I
    Γûá GUI1150E
    Γûá GUI1151W
    Γûá GUI1152E
    Γûá GUI1153E
    Γûá GUI1154W
    Γûá GUI1160W
    Γûá GUI1161W
    Γûá GUI1162W
    Γûá GUI1163W
    Γûá GUI1164W
    Γûá GUI1165W
    Γûá GUI1170P
    Γûá GUI1171P
    Γûá GUI1172P
    Γûá GUI1173W
    Γûá GUI1174W
    Γûá GUI1175P
    Γûá GUI1176P
    Γûá GUI1177P
    Γûá GUI1178P
    Γûá GUI1179W
    Γûá GUI1180W
    Γûá GUI1181W
    Γûá GUI1185W
    Γûá GUI1186W
    Γûá GUI1187W
    Γûá GUI1190W
    Γûá GUI1191W
    Γûá GUI1192W
    Γûá GUI1200I
    Γûá GUI1201W
    Γûá GUI1202W
    Γûá GUI1203W
    Γûá GUI1204W
    Γûá GUI1210I
    Γûá GUI1211W
    Γûá GUI1212W
    Γûá GUI1213W
    Γûá GUI1214W
    Γûá GUI1220W
    Γûá GUI1221W
    Γûá GUI1222W
    Γûá GUI1223W
    Γûá GUI1230W
    Γûá GUI1231W
    Γûá GUI1232W
    Γûá GUI1233W
    Γûá GUI1234W
    Γûá GUI1235W
    Γûá GUI1236W
    Γûá GUI1240W
    Γûá GUI1241W
    Γûá GUI1242W
    Γûá GUI1243W
    Γûá GUI1244W
    Γûá GUI1245W
    Γûá GUI1246W
    Γûá GUI1247W
    Γûá GUI1248W
    Γûá GUI1250W
    Γûá GUI1251W
    Γûá GUI1252W
    Γûá GUI1253W
    Γûá GUI1254W
    Γûá GUI1255W
    Γûá GUI1256W
    Γûá GUI1257W
    Γûá GUI1258W
    Γûá GUI1260W
    Γûá GUI1261W
    Γûá GUI1262W
    Γûá GUI1263W
    Γûá GUI1264W
    Γûá GUI1265W
    Γûá GUI1266W
    Γûá GUI1267W
    Γûá GUI1268W
    Γûá GUI1269W
    Γûá GUI1270W
    Γûá GUI1271W
    Γûá GUI1272W
    Γûá GUI1273W
    Γûá GUI1274W
    Γûá GUI1275W
    Γûá GUI1276W
    Γûá GUI1280W
    Γûá GUI1281W
    Γûá GUI1282W
    Γûá GUI1283W
    Γûá GUI1284W
    Γûá GUI1285W
    Γûá GUI1286W
    Γûá GUI1287W
    Γûá GUI1288W
    Γûá GUI1289W
    Γûá GUI1290W
    Γûá GUI1291W
    Γûá GUI1292W
    Γûá GUI1293W
    Γûá GUI1294W
    Γûá GUI1295W


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.1. GUI1001P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1001P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "This window contains child windows. Are you sure you wish
                   to destroy this window?"

    Description    The window you have selected to delete contains one or more
                   child windows which will also be deleted if you proceed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.2. GUI1002P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1002P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove the selected window?"

    Description    You are about to delete a window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.3. GUI1003P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1003P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove the selected control?"

    Description    You are about to delete a control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.4. GUI1004P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1004P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Delete all of the selected windows? "

    Description    You have selected multiple windows to delete.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.5. GUI1005P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1005P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to delete the entire menu (and all
                   sub-menu items)?"

    Description    Deleting the menu will also delete all submenus.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.6. GUI1006P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1006P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "This sub-menu contains other menu items. Are you sure you
                   wish to delete this menu?"

    Description    Deleting the sub-menu will also delete subordinate menu
                   items.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.7. GUI1007P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1007P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this menu item?"

    Description    You are about to delete a menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.8. GUI1008P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1008P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this resource entry (File
                   will remain intact)?"

    Description    Deleting the resource entry only deletes a reference to the
                   actual file - the original resource file will remain
                   untouched.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.9. GUI1009P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1009P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this message box entry?"

    Description    You are about to delete a message box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.10. GUI1010P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1010P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this help panel?"

    Description    You are about to delete a help panel.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.11. GUI1011P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1011P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove the selected code
                   module(s)?"

    Description    You are about to delete one or more code modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.12. GUI1012P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1012P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this action?"

    Description    You are about to delete an action module.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.13. GUI1013P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1013P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this external file group?"

    Description    You are about to remove an external file group


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.14. GUI1014P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1014P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this external file?"

    Description    You are about to remove a reference to an external file (the
                   original will remain intact).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.15. GUI1015P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1015P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Are you sure you wish to remove this environment?"

    Description    You are about to delete a compiler environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.16. GUI1020W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1020W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Guidelines is already running."

    Description    Only one instance of the Guidelines editor may be running.
                   Select Guidelines from the Task List to return to the
                   editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.17. GUI1021W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1021W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Guidelines is not installed properly. Please re-install
                   using the provided installation program."

    Description    The Guidelines configuration is not valid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.18. GUI1022W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1022W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "This feature is not available in the demonstration version
                   of Guidelines."

    Description    You are attempting to use a feature which is not available
                   in this demonstration version. Contact JBA to purchase a
                   complete version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.19. GUI1023W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1023W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "This version of Guidelines has expired."

    Description    You are attempting to use a version of Guidelines which has
                   passed its expiry date. Contact JBA to purchase a complete
                   version.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.20. GUI1024W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1024W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Program installed with invalid registration number. Please
                   re-install using the provided installation program."

    Description    An invalid registration number has been detected. You must
                   reinstall Guidelines with a valid registration number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.21. GUI1025P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1025P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Data has been changed. Do you wish to save this data
                   first?"

    Description    You have not saved the latest changes. They will be lost if
                   you do not save them.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.22. GUI1026P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1026P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Data from last session not properly saved. Do you wish to
                   save this in a file?"

    Description    The last session was improperly terminated


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.23. GUI1027W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1027W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to start timer for auto-save facility. Auto-save
                   will be disabled."

    Description    Guidelines could not start a timer


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.24. GUI1028W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1028W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Not enough memory to perform the requested action."

    Description    Guidelines has run out of memory. Close one or more
                   applications to try to free up some memory and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.25. GUI1029W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1029W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "An error has occurred while attempting to write to
                   GUIDE.INI. If you exit now"

    Description    An error has ocurred


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.26. GUI1030I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1030I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Dropping the field here would create a '%s' control named
                   '%s'."

    Description    You are about to create a control via a drag-and-drop
                   operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.27. GUI1031I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1031I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "If successful"

    Description     ┬╖┬╖┬╖


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.28. GUI1040W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1040W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Help information will not be available."

    Description    Guidelines could not load its help files. Check the
                   installation


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.29. GUI1041W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1041W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No help information has been provided for this item."

    Description    A help panel for the current item was not found in the help
                   file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.30. GUI1042W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1042W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to find the requested help panel (within %s)."

    Description    The help panel referred to is not defined in the help file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.31. GUI1043E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1043E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Unexpected help error (Code=0x%lX)."

    Description    An error ocurred when attempting to invoke help. Note down
                   the precise circumstances of the error


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.32. GUI1050E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1050E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Unable to load extension '%s'."

    Description    The extension is not valid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.33. GUI1051E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1051E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Extension '%s' is incompatible - Requires version %s (%s)."

    Description    The extension requires a different version of Guidelines.
                   Check the requirements in the accompanying documentation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.34. GUI1052W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1052W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Extension for window type '%s' not currently loaded."

    Description    The GUI file you are attempting to load uses a particular
                   control extension which is not installed. You may continue


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.35. GUI1053W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1053W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "More than one Version Control DLL detected. '%s' will not
                   be loaded."

    Description    Only one extension can be loaded to manage Version Control.
                   Deinstall any unwanted Version Control extensions and try
                   again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.36. GUI1054W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1054W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Attempted to register duplicate window type '%s' from
                   extension '%s'."

    Description    An extension contains a definition for a window type which
                   has already been defined by an existing extension. Contact
                   the supplier of the extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.37. GUI1055W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1055W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Attempted to register duplicate function '%s' from
                   extension '%s'."

    Description    An extension contains a definition for a function which has
                   already been defined by an existing extension. Contact the
                   supplier of the extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.38. GUI1056W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1056W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Attempted to register duplicate constant '%s' from
                   extension '%s'."

    Description    An extension contains a definition for a constant which has
                   already been defined by an existing extension. Contact the
                   supplier of the extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.39. GUI1060E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1060E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Unable to open file: '%s'"

    Description    The file could not be opened. It may be locked by another
                   process - check the other running programs and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.40. GUI1061E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1061E

    Type           Error

    Message        "An error occurred while reading file: '%s'"

    Description    The file  may be invalid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.41. GUI1062E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1062E

    Type           Error

    Message        "An error occurred while writing to file: '%s'"

    Description    The file  may be invalid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.42. GUI1063E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1063E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Not enough memory to load file: '%s'"

    Description    The file is too large to fit in the available memory. Close
                   some other applications to try to free some memory


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.43. GUI1064W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1064W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Drive %s is not ready."

    Description    The drive door may not be closed


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.44. GUI1065W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1065W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid path/file name: %s"

    Description    The directory or filename specified is invalid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.45. GUI1066W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1066W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "File not found: %s"

    Description    The file could not be found on the path specified. Check the
                   location of the file and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.46. GUI1067W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1067W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Incorrect version of editor. This file requires version
                   %s."

    Description    The GUI file was created with a different version of the
                   editor which is not compatible with the version you are
                   using. Check the documentation on using the Installation
                   program to convert GUI files.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.47. GUI1068E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1068E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Invalid GUI file: '%s'"

    Description    The file  is not valid. Check the file you are trying to
                   load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.48. GUI1069P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1069P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "%s already exists. Do you wish to overwrite this file?"

    Description    You are trying to save a file which has the same name as an
                   existing file. Make sure you wish to overwrite the existing
                   file with the current one.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.49. GUI1075W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1075W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Window/control '%s' contains a mis-matched parent window
                   information link. This problem has now been corrected."

    Description    The application contained some invalid information


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.50. GUI1076W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1076W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Menu template '%s' does not have a matching window
                   template. Menu information ignored."

    Description    The menu resource defined was not attached to any window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.51. GUI1080W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1080W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The name must not be blank."

    Description    Guidelines requries a valid name in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.52. GUI1081W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1081W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Name contains invalid characters. Only alphabetic"

    Description    The name you have entered may only contain the specified
                   characters. Edit the name to use characters from the valid
                   set.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.53. GUI1082W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1082W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The first character of the name must not be numeric."

    Description    The name must begin with an alphabetic character


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.54. GUI1083W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1083W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Name matches a system-reserved word."

    Description    The name you have used is reserved. Use a different name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.55. GUI1084W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1084W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'Gui' is a reserved name prefix."

    Description    Names that begin with 'Gui' are reserved for system use.
                   Change the name to begin with something else.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.56. GUI1085W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1085W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Name must not exceed %s characters."

    Description    The name is greater than the maximum length allowed. Shorten
                   the name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.57. GUI1086W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1086W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid application name. Must contain valid file name
                   characters only."

    Description    The application's name is not valid for this filesystem.
                   Change the name to a valid filename.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.58. GUI1087W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1087W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "A file name must be entered."

    Description    You must enter a valid filename in this field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.59. GUI1088W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1088W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The file name is restricted to 8 characters."

    Description    Re-enter a name of no more than 8 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.60. GUI1089W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1089W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "File name contains an invalid character(s)."

    Description    The file contains one or more invalid characters. Remove the
                   offending characters and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.61. GUI1090W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1090W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "File name '%s' is reserved. Please choose another name."

    Description    The filename you are attempting to use is reserved by
                   Guidelines. Change the name and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.62. GUI1091W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1091W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid %s spacing interval (2-999)."

    Description    You must enter a valid spacing interval


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.63. GUI1092W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1092W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The timeout period must be within 1-60 minutes."

    Description    The Autosave timeout must fall within the specified range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.64. GUI1100W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1100W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "This file does not contain a known resource type."

    Description    Guidelines could not find any known resource types in the
                   resource file you are attempting to load.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.65. GUI1101W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1101W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid  for %s resource file."

    Description    The resource file  is not valid. Try with another file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.66. GUI1102W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1102W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to open resource file '%s'."

    Description    The file could not be opened - it may be locked by another
                   process. Check and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.67. GUI1103W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1103W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "This resource file is already loaded under the name of
                   '%s'."

    Description    A resource already exists which has the same name as that
                   which you are trying to load. Remove the unwanted resource
                   and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.68. GUI1104W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1104W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Windows 3.0 icons are not currently supported."

    Description    Guidelines does not currently support the importing of this
                   file .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.69. GUI1105W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1105W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Windows 3.0 cursors are not current supported."

    Description    Guidelines does not currently support the importing of this
                   file .


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.70. GUI1106W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1106W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Bitmap not specified for menu item '%s'."

    Description    The menu item is defined as containing a bitmap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.71. GUI1107W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1107W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Bitmap not specified for static item '%s'."

    Description    The static control is defined as containing a bitmap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.72. GUI1108W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1108W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Icon not specified for static item '%s'."

    Description    The static control is defined as containing a bitmap


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.73. GUI1110E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1110E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Unable to create '%s' window."

    Description    Guidelines could not create a window of the specified type.
                   Try again with a valid type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.74. GUI1111W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1111W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Top-level window '%s' is positioned outside the screen
                   boundary. Its position will be re-adjusted."

    Description    The specified window appears outside the visible screen
                   area. Guidelines will move it for you to appear within the
                   screen boundary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.75. GUI1112W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1112W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "There is not enough room to evenly space these controls. Do
                   you wish to have them evenly overlapped?"

    Description    You are trying to space the selected controls


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.76. GUI1113I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1113I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "You cannot move a menu item between different sub-menus."

    Description    A menu item can only be moved within the same sub-menu. If
                   you wish to move an menu item between different sub-menus


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.77. GUI1114I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1114I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "All sub-menu items have been deleted. The frame window will
                   no longer contain a menu."

    Description    A menu requires at least one sub-menu


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.78. GUI1115W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1115W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Duplicate accelerator key/-combination."

    Description    The accelerator for this menu has already been used


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.79. GUI1120E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1120E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Not enough memory for clipboard data."

    Description    The data selected for the clipboard operation is too large.
                   Try again with a smaller selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.80. GUI1121E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1121E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Unable to retrieve clipboard data."

    Description    The clipboard may contain invalid data. Retry the operation
                   with valid data in the clipboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.81. GUI1122W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1122W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "A window must be selected to paste into."

    Description    To paste a control


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.82. GUI1123W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1123W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Memory storage required for cut/copy is too large."

    Description    The data selected for the clipboard operation is too large.
                   Try again with a smaller selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.83. GUI1124W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1124W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The clipboard data contains child windows. You must select
                   a client window to paste into."

    Description    To paste a control


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.84. GUI1130W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1130W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Too many code modules are already open. Please close any
                   unused modules before continuing."

    Description    The maximum number of open windows has been reached. Close
                   some module windows and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.85. GUI1131W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1131W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Too many modules are open already. Only some of the
                   selected modules were opened."

    Description    The maximum number of open windows has been reached. Close
                   some module windows and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.86. GUI1132I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1132I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Module %s has been modified. Do you wish to save the
                   changes?"

    Description    There are unsaved changes in the specified module. You
                   should save them before continuing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.87. GUI1133W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1133W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module %s contains errors. Do you wish to save the code
                   anyway?"

    Description    The specified module contains syntax errors. You should
                   correct them before trying to Generate the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.88. GUI1134W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1134W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No code defined for module '%s'."

    Description    The module is empty.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.89. GUI1135I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1135I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Syntax check successful."

    Description    The code in the module(s) do not contain any syntax errors.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.90. GUI1136W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1136W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code module too large. No more text may be entered."

    Description    There is too much text in the module. Try breaking the
                   module up into smaller functions.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.91. GUI1137W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1137W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code module '%s' too large to be loaded."

    Description    The module has exceeded the size limit. Edit the module to
                   reduce its size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.92. GUI1138W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1138W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code module '%s' too large to be saved."

    Description    The module has exceeded the size limit. Edit the module to
                   reduce its size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.93. GUI1140I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1140I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Text '%s' not found."

    Description    The text specified in the Find field could not be found.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.94. GUI1141I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1141I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Replace this occurence of '%s'?"

    Description    Press Yes to replace the text with the specified replacement
                   text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.95. GUI1142I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1142I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Replaced %d occurences of '%s'."

    Description    Guidelines has replaced the specified text in this many
                   occurences.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.96. GUI1150E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1150E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Import of file '%s' failed."

    Description    Guidelines could not import the specified file. Check the
                   file and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.97. GUI1151W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1151W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "File '%s' is empty."

    Description    The specified file does not contain any data.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.98. GUI1152E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1152E

    Type           Error

    Message        "File '%s' is too large to be imported."

    Description    Guidelines could not import the specified file


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.99. GUI1153E ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1153E

    Type           Error

    Message        "Export to file '%s' failed."

    Description    Guidelines could not export the code to the specified file.
                   Check the file is valid


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.100. GUI1154W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1154W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No code is selected for export."

    Description    You must select some code to export.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.101. GUI1160W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1160W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External include file '%s' cannot be found on the path
                   specified by the INCLUDE environment variable."

    Description    Check the Environment settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.102. GUI1161W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1161W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External library file '%s' cannot be found on the path
                   specified by the LIB environment variable."

    Description    Check the Environment settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.103. GUI1162W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1162W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External object file '%s' cannot be found on the path
                   specified by the LIB environment variable."

    Description    Check the Environment settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.104. GUI1163W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1163W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Loading of structures from external include file '%s'
                   aborted.\nError occurred on line %d"

    Description    The external include file could not be loaded


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.105. GUI1164W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1164W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "System external file reference cannot be deleted."

    Description    You can not delete external file references required by the
                   system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.106. GUI1165W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1165W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External include file '%s' caused the external structures
                   module to exceed 64K size limit."

    Description    The include file(s) are too large - edit them to reduce the
                   size and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.107. GUI1170P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1170P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "A non-windowed application cannot have windows/controls.
                   Delete all windows?"

    Description    You have specified the application to be non-windowed


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.108. GUI1171P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1171P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "A non-windowed application cannot use help panels. Delete
                   all help panels?"

    Description    You have specified the application to be non-windowed


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.109. GUI1172P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1172P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "A non-windowed application cannot use resources. Delete all
                   resources?"

    Description    You have specified the application to be non-windowed


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.110. GUI1173W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1173W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Function/method '%s' is not applicable for a non-windowed
                   application."

    Description    You have tried to call a function or method which is not
                   valid for a non-windowed application. Correct the code and
                   try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.111. GUI1174W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1174W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "The application directories defined for this GUI file are
                   not valid. Do you wish to correct these now?"

    Description    The GUI file you are attempting to load has invalid
                   directories specified. You can correct these by pressing the
                   Default button in the following dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.112. GUI1175P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1175P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "The environment specified for this GUI file is unknown. Do
                   you wish to correct this now?"

    Description    The GUI file you are attempting to load uses an environment
                   which is undefined in your setup. You should specify a valid
                   environment before attempting to run the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.113. GUI1176P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1176P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Would you like to rename the main source file to this name
                   as well?"

    Description    You have changed the name of the file. Guidelines can change
                   the name of the generated source files to match the
                   filename.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.114. GUI1177P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1177P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "Attached code module(s) exist using this window's old name.
                   Rename them also?"

    Description    You have changed the name of the window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.115. GUI1178P ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1178P

    Type           Prompt

    Message        "This window has attached code module(s). Delete these
                   also?"

    Description    You are about to delete a window which has code modules
                   attached. They will no longer be relevant


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.116. GUI1179W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1179W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No top-level window has been defined as the main window."

    Description    You must specify the main window for the application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.117. GUI1180W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1180W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Window '%s' has already been defined as the main window."

    Description    A main window has already been defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.118. GUI1181W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1181W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Control must have a name before actions can specified."

    Description    You are attempting to edit action modules for a control with
                   no name. Give the control a valid name and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.119. GUI1185W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1185W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No printer queue detected."

    Description    Install a printer and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.120. GUI1186W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1186W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to initialize printer."

    Description    There is a problem with the printer.  Check the cable and
                   make sure it is On Line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.121. GUI1187W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1187W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to send data to printer."

    Description    There is a problem with the printer.  Check the cable and
                   make sure it is On Line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.122. GUI1190W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1190W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No environment has been specified."

    Description    You must specify a target environment before generating the
                   application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.123. GUI1191W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1191W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "All of the environment programs/commands must be
                   specified."

    Description    You must specify valid commands for each field in the
                   environment.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.124. GUI1192W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1192W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to execute (or find) specified make program: '%s'"

    Description    Check the environment settings


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.125. GUI1200I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1200I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Code generation complete."

    Description    Guidelines has successfully completed generating the
                   application code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.126. GUI1201W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1201W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code generation failed in module '%s'."

    Description    An error has ocurred while generating code for the specified
                   module. Check the syntax in the Action Editor and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.127. GUI1202W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1202W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code generation aborted by user."

    Description    The user aborted the code generation prematurely. The code
                   must be re-generated before compiling.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.128. GUI1203W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1203W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to open file '%s'."

    Description    Guidelines could not open the specified file. Check to see
                   if it is in use in another session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.129. GUI1204W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1204W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to write to file '%s'."

    Description    Guidelines could not write to specified file. Check to see
                   if it is in use in another session.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.130. GUI1210I ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1210I

    Type           Informational

    Message        "Compilation completed successfully."

    Description    Guidelines has successfully completed generating the
                   application code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.131. GUI1211W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1211W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Compilation failed (ERRORLEVEL %d)."

    Description    An error ocurred while compiling the code. Check the syntax
                   of your code modules in the Action Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.132. GUI1212W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1212W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Compilation aborted by the user."

    Description    The user aborted the compilation prematurely. The code must
                   be re-compiled before executing.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.133. GUI1213W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1213W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "This program cannot be recompiled while it is still
                   running."

    Description    Terminate the running program before recompiling the
                   application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.134. GUI1214W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1214W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unable to execute program: '%s'."

    Description    The program could not be executed. In may be an invalid file
                   - recompile the application and try again.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.135. GUI1220W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1220W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid character: '%s'"

    Description    The character specified is not legal.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.136. GUI1221W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1221W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "New-line character found within string."

    Description    A string must appear on a single line.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.137. GUI1222W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1222W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "No end of comment detected."

    Description     ┬╖┬╖┬╖


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.138. GUI1223W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1223W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Token/literal exceeds 256 characters in length."

    Description    The token is too long - shorten it to less than 256
                   characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.139. GUI1230W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1230W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Syntax error: Missing %s before %s."

    Description    You are missing a keyword - check the nesting and matching
                   of 'end' statements.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.140. GUI1231W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1231W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Syntax error: Missing %s before end-of-module."

    Description    You are missing a keyword - check that the keyword matches
                   up with statements above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.141. GUI1232W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1232W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Expecting end-of-module before '%s'."

    Description    You have extra statements at the end of the module. Check
                   for opening keywords matching.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.142. GUI1233W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1233W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Expecting type: '%s' - found '%s'."

    Description    A valid type was not specified. Try using a variable of the
                   specified type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.143. GUI1234W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1234W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module name too large: '%s' "

    Description    Shorten the module name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.144. GUI1235W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1235W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module name too similiar to module '%s'."

    Description    The name of the module could potentially conflict with
                   another. Change the name to avoid confusion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.145. GUI1236W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1236W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code incomplete in module %s."

    Description    Check for missing keywords in the code.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.146. GUI1240W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1240W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Window name is not unique."

    Description    Windows must have unique names - choose another unique name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.147. GUI1241W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1241W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Message box name is not unique."

    Description    Message boxes must have unique names - choose another unique
                   name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.148. GUI1242W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1242W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Help panel name is not unique."

    Description    Help panels must have unique names - choose another unique
                   name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.149. GUI1243W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1243W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Resource name is not unique."

    Description    Resources must have unique names - choose another unique
                   name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.150. GUI1244W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1244W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module name is not unique."

    Description    Modules must have unique names - choose another unique name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.151. GUI1245W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1245W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Variable name is not unique."

    Description    Variables must have unique names - choose another unique
                   name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.152. GUI1246W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1246W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Environment name is not unique."

    Description    Environments must have unique names - choose another unique
                   name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.153. GUI1247W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1247W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External file group name not unique."

    Description    External file groups must have unique names - choose another
                   unique name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.154. GUI1248W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1248W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "External function name already defined."

    Description    An external function of the same name is already defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.155. GUI1250W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1250W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Symbol '%s' already defined."

    Description    Choose another unique name for the symbol.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.156. GUI1251W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1251W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Symbol '%s' not a structure."

    Description    You are using a symbol as a structure when it is not. Check
                   the available structures.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.157. GUI1252W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1252W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Symbol not defined: '%s'"

    Description    The symbol is not defined. Check the spelling.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.158. GUI1253W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1253W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module '%s' not defined."

    Description    The module is not defined. Check the spelling.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.159. GUI1254W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1254W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Window '%s' is not defined."

    Description    The window is not defined. Check the spelling.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.160. GUI1255W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1255W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Unknown window property/method: '%s'"

    Description    The specified property or method is not defined. Check the
                   valid properties of the window or control type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.161. GUI1256W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1256W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Event '%s' is undefined."

    Description    The specified event is not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.162. GUI1257W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1257W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Resource '%s' not defined."

    Description    The specified resource is not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.163. GUI1258W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1258W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Help panel '%s' is not defined."

    Description    The specified help panel is not defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.164. GUI1260W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1260W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'void' allowed only for module return type."

    Description    You tried to define a variable of type void. Give the
                   variable a valid type other than void.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.165. GUI1261W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1261W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Thread module return type must be 'void'."

    Description    Threads can not return a value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.166. GUI1262W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1262W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Initialization of structures not permitted."

    Description    You have tried to initialize a structure in its declaration.
                   Initialize it in the variable definition instead.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.167. GUI1263W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1263W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Initialization of arrays not permitted."

    Description    You have tried to initialize an array in its declaration.
                   Initialize it in the variable definition instead.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.168. GUI1264W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1264W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Array subscript must be integral number: '%s'"

    Description    You must refer to an item within an array with an integral
                   number.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.169. GUI1265W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1265W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Missing array subscript on '%s'"

    Description    You have referred to an array without specifying a
                   subscript.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.170. GUI1266W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1266W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Symbol name '%s' is reserved. Please choose another name."

    Description    You have tried to declare a symbol which conflicts with a
                   reserved name.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.171. GUI1267W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1267W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Structure '%s' does not contain member '%s'."

    Description    You have tried to access a member which does not appear in
                   the specified structure. Check the spelling and the
                   structure itself.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.172. GUI1268W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1268W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Structure type '%s' can only be used within data
                   declarations."

    Description    You have tried to refer to a structure where Guidelines was
                   expecting a variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.173. GUI1269W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1269W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Structure member '%s' already defined."

    Description    The specified structure is already defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.174. GUI1270W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1270W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Fixed length specifier valid only for structure members."

    Description    Only structures may have a fixed length specifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.175. GUI1271W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1271W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Fixed length precision valid only for structure members."

    Description    Only structures may have a fixed precision specifier.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.176. GUI1272W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1272W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid scaled precision (must be between 1 and 30
                   inclusive)."

    Description    Change the precision of the scaled to fall within the
                   specified range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.177. GUI1273W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1273W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid decimal place size (must be between 1 and %s
                   inclusive)."

    Description    Change the decimal place size to fall within the specified
                   range.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.178. GUI1274W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1274W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'anystruct' allowed only on external function definitions."

    Description    You have used the anystruct keyword illegally - specify a
                   valid type.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.179. GUI1275W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1275W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Variable '%s' is not used."

    Description    No reference was found to the specified variable.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.180. GUI1276W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1276W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Variable '%s' set but not referenced."

    Description    The variable must be referenced as well as set


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.181. GUI1280W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1280W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid operator: '%s'"

    Description    The operator is not valid.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.182. GUI1281W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1281W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Invalid data conversion in module '%s'."

    Description    You are trying to convert between two incompatible types.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.183. GUI1282W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1282W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Pass-by-reference not allowed for literal/intermediate
                   result value."

    Description    You are trying to dereference an invalid value.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.184. GUI1283W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1283W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Pass-by-reference already implied for this data type."

    Description    You are trying to explicitly pass a type by reference when
                   this is already implicitly done for you.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.185. GUI1284W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1284W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "For loop variable must be numeric."

    Description    You have tried to use a non-numeric type as the counter in a
                   for loop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.186. GUI1285W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1285W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Missing return statement."

    Description    A code module with a return type specified did not contain
                   the required return statement.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.187. GUI1286W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1286W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Return statement not allowed within threads. Use the
                   ExitThread function."

    Description    Threads must be terminated with the ExitThread function -
                   return is only valid in code modules.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.188. GUI1287W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1287W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Illegal context - 'break' not used within loop."

    Description    You are trying to use the break command illegally within a
                   loop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.189. GUI1288W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1288W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Illegal context - 'continue' not used within loop."

    Description    You are trying to use the continue command illegally within
                   a loop.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.190. GUI1289W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1289W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Module '%s' cannot be called directly."

    Description    You must invoke the module using the proper procedure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.191. GUI1290W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1290W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'Load' or 'Unload' can only be used with top-level
                   windows."

    Description    You are trying to Load or Unload a control. These operations
                   are only valid for dialogs or frames.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.192. GUI1291W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1291W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Code cannot be reached."

    Description    The logical flow of the module will never reach the
                   specified code. Check for early return statements


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.193. GUI1292W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1292W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "Not enough memory to expand symbol table."

    Description    The symbol table is too large. Try closing some applications


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.194. GUI1293W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1293W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'%s' construct required for '%s'."

    Description    Only part of a switch/case or if/else construct was found.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.195. GUI1294W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1294W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'%s' must appear before '%s' clause."

    Description    The 'case' keyword must appear before 'otherwise' clause.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1.196. GUI1295W ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

GUI1295W

    Type           Warning

    Message        "'%s' clause is already defined."

    Description    The clause (eg. 'otherwise') has been defined above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Presentation Parameters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation Parameters

This section provides a reference to the use of Presentation Parameters in
Guidelines. Since Presentation Parameters are a widely misunderstood part of
Presentation Manager programming, they are given a separate section in this
Help text to explain their use.

What are Presentation Parameters?

Presentation parameters are items of information passed to various PM windows
and controls which control the way they display information. They are generally
used to specify the font and colors used by the window or control to display
information, though they could be easily extended to include more information.

Using Presentation Parameters

Presentation parameters are available for selection in the Details dialog boxes
of a number of windows and controls. Whenever presentation parameters are
available, choose one to apply by selecting its name from the drop-down listbox
supplied on the dialog box for this purpose. The control or window will be
updated to show the new presentation parameters when you select Ok to save the
details and exit the dialog box.

Editing Presentation Parameters

Presentation parameters are edited by selecting the Presentation parameters
option from the Edit menu. This displays the Presentation Parameters Dialog
Box.

On this dialog box, you can select the following information which defines your
presentation parameters to Guidelines:

    Γûá Presentation Objects

    Choose the presentation parameter to edit by selecting its name from this
    list box. If you wish to add a new presentation parameter, select the Add
    pushbutton as detailed below.

    Γûá Attributes

    Choose the presentation parameter's attribute you wish to change by
    selecting one from the list supplied.

    Γûá Colors

    Choose the color you wish to apply to the currently-selected Presentation
    Object/Attribute pair.

    Γûá Fonts

    Choose the font in which you wish the currently-selected Presentation
    Object/Attribute pair to be displayed.

    When you change one of the available attributes for a Presentation Object,
    the Sample window shows what the attributes will look like when displayed
    in a Guidelines window or control.

    If you wish to add a new presentation object, select the Add pushbutton.
    This displays the Presentation Parameter Name Dialog Box. Type in the name
    you wish for the new presentation object and select Ok or press enter to
    create the new object; Select Cancel or press esc to cancel the request.

    When you select Ok or Cancel from this dialog box, you are returned to the
    Presentation Parameters Dialog Box.

    If you wish to change the name of an existing presentation object, select
    the Change pushbutton and change the name in the Presentation Parameter
    Name Dialog Box as described for the Add pushbutton.

    To delete a presentation object, select the Delete pushbutton. If you
    selected Confirm on presentation parameter delete in the Confirmation
    Options Dialog Box, you will be prompted for confirmation that you wish to
    delete the presentation object; otherwise, the object will be deleted
    without any prompting.

    To exit from the Presentation Parameters Dialog Box, select Exit or press
    enter.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Glossary

Action bar

The action bar contains keywords that provide access to commands available for
the window. When a user selects an action bar choice, a pull-down menu displays
the commands available for the keyword.

Action bar choice

A keyword on the action bar which, when highlighted, displays a pull-down menu
with the commands available for the keyword.

Active window

The active window is the window that has a coloured title bar and outline.
Other windows visible are tasks running in the background, and not currently
accepting user input.

Application title

The Application Title is entered into the Presentation Manager Task switch List
box when the compiled application is actually running. Users can move between
active applications running under OS/2 by selecting a name from the task switch
list. This string will also appear in generated source files. An application
title should always be given a short and meaningful description.

Combobox

A combination box is two controls in one: an entry field and a list box.
Combination boxes let the user enter data by typing in the entry field or by
choosing from a list in the list box.

Control

The means by which an operator gives input to an application. A choice
corresponds to a control.

Clip children window flag

This window flag prevents a window from painting over its child windows. This
flag protects child windows but increases the time necessary to calculate the
visible region. This flag is usually not necessary, since if the parent and
child windows overlap and are both invalidated, the system draws the parent
window before drawing the child window. If the child window is invalidated
independent of the parent window, the system re-draws only the child window. If
the update region of the parent window does not intersect the child window,
drawing the parent window should not disturb the child window.

Clip parent window flag

This window flag prevents a window from painting over its parent window. The
flag clips the window to the boundaries of its parent. This flag simplifies the
calculation of the visible region but is potentially dangerous, since the
parent window's visible region is usually larger than the child window. Windows
with this flag set should not draw outside their boundaries.

Child window

A window that is positioned relative to another window (either a main window or
another child window).

Client area

The area of a window not occupied by the title bar, action bar or scrollbar. It
can contain textual information, selection fields and/or entry fields.

Clip siblings window flag

This window flag prevents a window from painting over its sibling windows. This
window flag protects sibling windows but increases the time necessary to
calculate the visible region. This flag is appropriate for windows that overlap
and that have same parent window.

Design mode

The Guidelines mode that allows you to create and edit PM applications. When in
design mode, group mode and test mode functions are unavailable.

Dialog windows

A type of window that contains one or more controls for the formatted display
and entry of data.

Directory list

The disk drive, once selected, determines the contents of the directory list
box adjacent to the disk drive list. This list box contains a list of all the
directories or sub-directories on the currently selected disk drive. A
directory may be selected by a double-click on a directory or sub-directory
name. If the file you want to open is not available in the current directory
you can select a different drive or directory from the directories list box.

Disabled frame window

This setting disables the window so it cannot receive user input. Window mouse
and keyboard input to a window are disabled. You can use this setting to
temporarily prevent the user from using the window.

Drive list

A list box of the available disk drives known to your system. These drives
could be either local or network drives, depending on the configuration and
connections available to your system. To choose a disk drive, double-click on
one of the displayed drive letters in the list. The disk drive must be in a
ready state, else an error message will be issued.

Double click

A rapid double click of the left mouse button is used to start Presentation
Manager programs or initiate other actions such as selecting items from a list
box, or gaining fast access to Guidelines features (such as menu editing).

Dragging

A mouse operation where the mouse pointer is position then the left button
pressed and held down.  The mouse is then moved and the selected object is
'dragged' to a new size of location.  Very useful for re-sizing positioning
windows.

Edit-field control

The means by which the application receives data entered by the user in an edit
field. When it has the input focus, it displays a flashing pointer at the
position where the next typed character will go.

Error box

A window that contains an error message from the editor.

Event driven

A term that refers to the nature of applications that are developed using
Guidelines. Events initiated by the user (such as clicking a button) drive the
application, and actions are specified for the events.

Frame

The part of a window that can contain several different visual elements
specified by the application, but drawn by the Presentation Manager. The frame
encloses the client area.

Frame window

The basic window used by most Presentation Manager applications.  A frame
window provides a base for the application's main window, dialog windows, and
message boxes.

Field-level help

Information specific to the field on which the cursor is positioned. This help
function is "contextual" because it provides information about a specific item
as it is currently used; the information is dependent upon the context within
the work session.

Focus

Input focus indicates the area of the screen that will receive input from an
input device (typically the keyboard) and is denoted by the position of the
cursor.  The focus can only occur in the currently active (forefront) window.

Global help panels

Global help panels form a repository of consistently reusable help resources.
All the support required to imbed contextual help into your application is
provided as part of the generation/compilation step.

Greyed

Option is 'greyed' to indicate it is not valid under the current circumstances

Group

A collection of logically-connected controls. For example, the styles
associated with a button.

Group mode

The Guidelines mode that allows you to align, space and size groups of controls
within a window. When in group mode, design mode and test mode functions are
unavailable.

GUI

Graphical User Interface, screens comprised of standard windows and features,
usually operated with a pointing device such as a mouse.

GUI definition file

The definition of application windows are saved in a graphical user interface
definition file (GUI file).  Information in GUI files is stored in a
proprietary .

Help request message

A help message is identical to a normal notification message but a help message
implies that the application should respond by displaying help information.

Icon

Icons are a pictorial representation of an item the user can select. Icons can
represent items ( such as a document or file) that the user wants to work with,
and actions that the user wants to perform. In the Presentation Manager, icons
are used for data objects, system actions, and minimized applications.

Interface definition file

Interface definition files are where the editor saves all the controls and
windows that you create for your application within the editing session. It is
from this definition file that C language source code and supporting files for
compilation will be generated. The definition files are in a binary , and are
readable only by the editor and system utilities.

Listbox

A control window containing a vertical list of selectable items, a list of
choices.

Menu

A type of panel that consists of one or more selection fields. Also called a
menu panel.

Message

     1. In Presentation Manager, a packet of data used for communication
        between the Presentation Interface and windowed application.

     2. In a user interface, information not requested by users but presented
        to users by the system in response to a user action or internal
        process. Messages on status, problems, or user actions from an
        application should be distinguished from a "message" or note sent to
        users by other users over a communications link.

    Message box

    A window that contains an informational message from the editor. Not an
    error message. Message boxes are presented in response to a user action or
    internal process.

    Mouse

    A hand-held device that is moved around to position the pointer on the
    screen.

    Multiple-Line edit field control

    An edit field for entering several lines of text or importing blocks of
    text.

    Multitasking

    Multitasking is a feature of OS/2 that allows you to run more than one
    program (or task) at a time, rather than completing programs (or tasks)
    sequentially.

    Normal notification message

    A normal notification message is sent to the owner window when it has a
    command to report or when a keystroke has been translated by an accelerator
    table into a notification message.

    Panel

    A panel is an arrangement of information grouped together for presentation
    to the user. Panels are displayed to the user in windows.

    Presentation parameters

    Presentation parameters contain attributes about visual appearance.
    Presentation Parameters allow you to define global objects for application
    use combining fonts and colors. Named presentation parameter objects may be
    applied to all controls, menus, frame windows and dialogs when custom
    presentation is required.

    Presentation Manager

    The OS/2 control program that displays a graphics-based window interface to
    applications and files used in OS/2.

    Process

    In the Presentation Manager environment, a process, or task, is a program
    that uses a set of system resources to perform work. System resources used
    by processes include system files, system memory and interprocess
    communications.

    Scroll bar

    A control window contained within a window that allows you to scroll
    additional data into an associated window area. Scrolling operations can be
    either horizontal or vertical, depending on the orientation of the scroll
    bar.

    Single line edit field control.

    An edit field for entering a single line of text.

    Start of group style

    Specifies the first control of a group of controls in which the user can
    move from one control to the next by using the ARROW keys. All controls
    defined after the control with the Start of Group style belong to the same
    group. The next control with the Start of Group style ends the first group
    and starts a new group.

    Synchronous-paint

    A window that is synchronously updated is called a synchronous-paint
    window. Use a synchronous paint window when you want a window to be
    re-drawn quickly.

    System command message

    An application that has a window with a System menu can change the size and
    position of that window by sending system commands. The system commands are
    usually generated by the user selecting commands from the system menu.

    Tag language

    Help panels contain the responses to user help requests. The text of help
    panels include "tags" the writer imbeds as the help information is
    composed. These tags comprise the Information Presentation Facility Tag
    Language, which is the mechanism that defines the characteristics of text
    presentation for a panel displayed in the help window.

    Tabstop style

    This style is usually used in conjunction with the Start of Group style.
    When enabled, the current control will receive the focus when the user
    presses the TAB key to move between controls.

    Task Manager

    The task manager is an OS/2 application that controls which executing group
    is visible on your monitor and excepting keyboard input. It provides a list
    of active processes, and allows you to switch between them. The task
    manager is invoked by pressing Alt + Esc, by clicking on the desktop, or by
    selecting Task Manager from the system menu.

    Test mode

    The Guidelines mode that allows you to test un-compiled application windows
    as if they were compiled and executing within an application. When in test
    mode, design mode and group mode functions are unavailable.

    Visible region

    The portion of the presentation space visible in a window is called the
    visible region When you paint graphics in a window, the system
    automatically clips the graphics data to the window's visible region. The
    visible region of a window is the presentation space clipped to the
    boundary of the window and the boundaries of any overlying window.

    Window

    A rectangular area the screen that displays a panel or a portion of a
    panel. Windows can occupy a subset of the available screen space, or the
    entire screen. They can be moved on the screen, and can be overlapped, or
    positioned on top of one another.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name Field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Title Field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Type Field


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clicking the Left Mouse Button on the OK button means that you wish to accept
any changes that have been made in the window and remove the window.

The same effect is achieved if the [ENTER] (carriage return) key or the [Alt-O]
key combination is pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Clicking the Left Mouse Button on the Cancel button removes the window without
applying any changes that were not previously applied in that window.

The same effect is achieved if the [ESC] (Escape) key or the [Alt-C] key
combination is pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

LMB - Left Mouse Button


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Position Select cursor:

Used to select a position in a window.

The tip of the arrow (hotspot) corresponds to the bottom left corner if an item
is to be placed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Within Guidelines it is possible to use different combinations of tools to
create executable programs. Each of these combinations is known as an
Environment

This includes their command line options, and the settings of the Environment
Variables they use.